manualshive.com logo in svg

Mitsubishi Electric FX-485ADP, User Manual

The Mitsubishi Electric FX-485ADP is a state-of-the-art device that transforms analog signals into digital signals for seamless integration with your Mitsubishi electronics. Ensure optimum performance and unlock the device's full potential by downloading the detailed user manual, absolutely free, from our website.

Share
Download
background image

E-13

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Inverter Communication

2 Specifications

2.4 Execution Times in Inverter Communication Instructions

A

Comm

on I
te

ms

B

N:

N N
etwo

rk

C

Paral

le

l Li

nk

D

Com

puter Li

nk

E

In

verter

C

omm

uni
cation

F

N

on-Proto

col

C

ommunicati

on

(R

S/RS
2 Instru

ction
)

G

No

n-

Protoc

ol

Co

mmuni

ca

tion 

(FX

2N

-2

32IF)

H

Programm

ing

Comm

uni
cation

I

Re

mo
te

 

Ma
intenance

Apx.A

D

isco
nti

nued

models

*1.

Refer to the following table for the number of sent/received characters.

*2.

Indicates the number of sent/received characters required to write 1 parameter.
The IVBWR instruction executes parameter writing by the number of times of communication 

.

*3.

The inverter gives no response because the inverter is being reset.
The PLC waits for 2.2 s until reset of the inverter is completed, and then completes execution of the
inverter communication instruction.

*4.

Refer to the following table for the data check time in inverters.
Make sure to refer to the manual of the inverter used, and confirm the data check time for the
communication command used.

The IVWR, IVRD and IVBWR instructions automatically change expansion parameters and the 2nd
parameter. 
The data check time for the last (2nd or 3rd) sending/receiving in the IVWR and IVRD instructions and
the data check time for the last sending/receiving of each parameter writing in the IVBWR instruction
correspond to parameter reading/writing (< 30 ms). 
The data check time for sending and receiving (expansion parameter change and 2nd parameter
change) other than the above correspond to various monitors (< 12 ms).

Inverter 

communication 

instruction

Parameter/

instruction code

First

Second

Third

Sending Receiving Total Sending Receiving Total Sending Receiving Total

IVRD

Change of the 2nd 
parameter is 
unnecessary.

11

4

15

9

11

20

-

-

-

Change of the 2nd 
parameter is 
necessary.

11

4

15

11

4

15

9

11

20

IVDR

HF3, HFA, HFF

11

4

15

-

-

-

-

-

-

HFD

13

0

*3

13

-

-

-

-

-

-

Other than above

13

4

17

-

-

-

-

-

-

IVCK

H73, H7A, H7F, H6C

9

9

18

-

-

-

-

-

-

Other than above

9

11

20

-

-

-

-

-

-

IVWR

Change of the 2nd 
parameter is 
unnecessary.

11

4

15

13

4

17

-

-

-

Change of the 2nd 
parameter is 
necessary.

11

4

15

11

4

15

13

4

17

IVBWR

*2

Change of the 2nd 
parameter is 
unnecessary.

11

4

15

13

4

17

-

-

-

Change of the 2nd 
parameter is 
necessary.

11

4

15

11

4

15

13

4

17

IVMC

-

19

19

38

-

-

-

-

-

-

Item

Data check time

Various monitors, operation command, set frequency 

(RAM)

<12ms

Parameters read/write, set frequency (EEPROM)

<30ms

Parameter all clear/all clear

<5s

Reset instruction

No response

(The PLC waits for 2.2 s until reset of the inverter is 

completed, and then completes execution of the 

inverter communication instruction.)

  

S

2

Summary of Contents for FX-485ADP

Page 1: ...tion RS 232C Interface FX3U 232 BD FX1N 232 BD FX3U 232ADP MB FX0N 232ADP FX3G 232 BD FX 232ADP FX2N 232 BD FX2N 232IF FX2NC 232ADP RS 485 Interface FX3U 485 BD FX2NC 485ADP FX3U 485ADP MB FX1N 485 BD FX3G 485 BD FX0N 485ADP FX3G 485 BD RJ FX 485ADP FX2N 485 BD RS 485 232C Converter FX 485PC IF RS 422 Interface FX3U 422 BD FX2N 422 BD FX3G 422 BD FX1N 422 BD USB Interface FX3U USB BD Ethernet FX3U...

Page 2: ......

Page 3: ...s all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case 3 Note that the output current of the service power supply for sensors varies depending on the model and the absence presence of extension b...

Page 4: ...rly wire to the terminal block European type in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Twist the end of strand wire...

Page 5: ...Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Manual number JY997D16901 Manual revision P Date 11 2017 This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible...

Page 6: ...strict quality control However when installing the product where major accidents or losses could occur if the product fails install appropriate backup or failsafe functions into the system When combining this product with other products please confirm the standards and codes of regulation to which the user should follow Moreover please confirm the compatibility of this product with the system mach...

Page 7: ...munication Equipment A 23 2 1 Relationship between Equipment and Communication Types A 23 2 2 Communication Equipment Applicability Map A 24 2 2 1 FX3U and FX3UC D DS DSS PLCs A 24 2 2 2 FX3UC 32MT LT 2 PLCs A 28 2 2 3 FX3G and FX3GC PLCs A 30 2 2 4 FX3S PLC A 32 2 2 5 FX2N and FX2NC PLCs A 34 2 2 6 FX1S FX1N and FX1NC PLCs A 36 2 2 7 FX0N PLCs A 38 2 2 8 FX1 FX2 FX FX2C FX0 and FX0S PLCs referenc...

Page 8: ...X3UC A 72 3 4 1 Extension of Port For FX3G FX3GC PLC A 72 3 4 2 Extension of Port For FX3U FX3UC PLC A 74 3 4 3 Limitation when ch1 and ch2 are used at the same time A 75 4 Version Number A 76 4 1 Manufacturer s serial number check method A 76 4 1 1 Checking the nameplate A 76 4 1 2 Checking the front of the product A 77 4 2 Version check A 77 5 Introduction of Manuals Type Reading Method and Acqu...

Page 9: ...stem Configuration and Equipment Selection B 12 3 1 System Configuration B 12 3 2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment B 13 4 Wiring B 18 4 1 Wiring Procedure B 18 4 2 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors B 19 4 2 1 Twisted pair cable B 19 4 2 2 10BASE T cable B 19 4 2 3 Connecting cables B 20 4 2 4 Connecting terminal resistors B 22 4 3 Connection Diagram B 23 4 4 Grounding B 25 5 Com...

Page 10: ...Checking data transfer sequence errors B 51 9 6 3 Checking error codes B 51 10 Related Data B 54 10 1 Related Device List B 54 10 1 1 For FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC PLCs B 54 10 1 2 For FX0N and FX1S PLCs B 58 10 2 Details of Related Devices B 60 10 2 1 Parameter setting M8038 B 60 10 2 2 Channel setting M8179 B 60 10 2 3 Serial communication error M8063 and M8438 B 60 10...

Page 11: ...N FX2NC FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC Series C 12 3 System Configuration and Selection C 13 3 1 System Configuration C 13 3 1 1 Rule for connection C 13 3 2 Configuration of Each Group C 14 3 3 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment C 18 4 Wiring C 24 4 1 Wiring Procedure C 24 4 2 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors C 25 4 2 1 Twisted pair cable C 25 4 2 2 10BASE T cable C 25 4 2 3 Connecti...

Page 12: ...ar Parallel Link Mode C 47 8 1 1 System configuration example C 47 8 1 2 Setting contents C 47 8 1 3 Program for master station C 48 8 1 4 Program for slave station C 48 9 Troubleshooting C 49 9 1 Checking FX PLC Version Applicability C 49 9 2 Checking Communication Status Based on LED Indication C 49 9 3 Checking Installation and Wiring C 49 9 4 Checking Sequence Program C 49 9 5 Checking Absence...

Page 13: ...D 14 3 1 System Configuration D 14 3 2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment D 15 3 2 1 For communication in accordance with RS 232C D 15 3 2 2 For communication in accordance with RS 485 D 21 4 Wiring D 27 4 1 Wiring Procedure D 28 4 2 Selecting Connection Method D 29 4 2 1 For communication in accordance with RS 232C 1 to 1 connection D 29 4 2 2 For communication in accordance with RS 48...

Page 14: ...59 7 2 WR Command Reads Device Memory in 1 Word Units D 60 7 3 QR Command Reads Device Memory in 1 Word Units D 62 7 4 BW Command Writes Device Memory in 1 Bit Units D 64 7 5 WW Command Writes Device Memory in 1 Word Units D 65 7 6 QW Command Writes Device Memory in 1 Word Units D 67 7 7 BT Command Tests Device Memory in 1 Bit Units by Writing Arbitrarily D 69 7 8 WT Command Tests Device Memory in...

Page 15: ...nction ON M8126 and M8426 D 92 9 2 4 On demand send processing M8127 and M8427 D 92 9 2 5 On demand error flag M8128 and M8428 D 93 9 2 6 On demand data word byte changeover M8129 and M8429 D 93 9 2 7 Serial communication error code D8063 and D8438 D 93 9 2 8 Communication format setting D8120 and D8420 D 94 9 2 9 Station number settings D8121 and D8421 D 95 9 2 10 On demand data head device numbe...

Page 16: ...tion example E 14 3 System Configuration and Selection E 16 3 1 System Configuration E 16 3 2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment E 18 4 Wiring E 23 4 1 Wiring Procedure E 24 4 2 Selecting Cables and Connection Devices E 25 4 2 1 S500 E500 A500 F500 V500 D700 and E700 Series PU connector E 25 4 2 2 A500 F500 and V500 Series FR A5NR E 26 4 2 3 F800 A800 F700 and A700 Series built in RS 48...

Page 17: ...setting method reference E 68 5 9 Cautions on Setting E 69 6 Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller E 70 6 1 Parameter Assigning Method E 70 6 2 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method GX Works2 E 71 6 2 1 Operating procedure E 71 6 3 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method FXGP WIN E 73 6 3 1 Operating procedure E 73 7 Creating Programs FX2N FX2NC E 75 7 1 Checking Contents...

Page 18: ...verter instruction codes E 104 9 5 Inverter Operation Control Instruction PLC Inverter FNC271 IVDR E 105 9 5 1 Function and operation E 105 9 5 2 Inverter instruction codes E 105 9 6 Inverter Parameter Reading PLC Inverter FNC272 IVRD E 106 9 6 1 Function and operation E 106 9 6 2 Inverter instruction codes E 106 9 6 3 Program example of second parameter specification code E 106 9 7 Inverter Param...

Page 19: ...version D8105 E 141 12 2 8 Inverter response waiting time D8154 E 141 12 2 9 Step number of instruction using communication port D8155 E 141 12 2 10 Error code D8156 E 142 12 2 11 Error occurrence step number latch D8157 E 143 12 3 Related Device List FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC E 144 12 4 Details of Related Devices FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC E 145 12 4 1 Instruction execution complete M8029 E 145 ...

Page 20: ...uration F 15 3 2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment F 16 3 2 1 For communication in accordance with RS 232C F 16 3 2 2 For communication in accordance with RS 485 F 22 4 Wiring F 27 4 1 Wiring Procedure F 27 4 2 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors F 28 4 2 1 When using ch0 in FX3G FX3GC PLC F 28 4 2 2 Twisted pair cable F 28 4 2 3 10BASE T cable F 29 4 2 4 Connecting cables F 30 4 2...

Page 21: ...Use RS2 Instruction F 62 8 2 1 Applicable frames F 63 8 2 2 Function and operation F 65 8 2 3 Send receive data and amount of data F 66 8 2 4 Operation when data is sent F 68 8 2 5 Operation when data is received F 68 8 2 6 Sum check code F 71 8 3 Operation of Control Line F 72 8 4 Important Points in Creating Programs F 75 8 5 Communication Error F 75 9 Practical Program Example RS2 Instruction F...

Page 22: ...mmunication parameter display D8405 F 95 12 2 16 Operation mode display D8419 F 96 12 3 Related Devices RS2 Instruction F 96 12 4 Details of Related Devices RS2 Instruction F 97 12 4 1 Serial communication error M8062 M8063 and M8438 F 97 12 4 2 Sending wait flag M8371 M8401 and M8421 F 98 12 4 3 Sending request M8372 M8402 and M8422 F 98 12 4 4 Receiving complete flag M8373 M8403 and M8423 F 98 1...

Page 23: ... versions setting an alternative model G 7 2 Specification G 8 2 1 Communication Specifications G 8 3 System Configuration and Selection G 9 3 1 System Configuration G 9 3 2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment G 9 3 3 Connection to PLC G 10 4 Wiring G 12 4 1 Pin Arrangement G 12 4 2 Connection to External Equipment with Terminal Specifications without Control Line G 12 4 3 Connection to ...

Page 24: ...10 Receiving suspension waiting time BFM 12 G 26 5 4 11 Amount of remaining send data BFM 13 G 26 5 4 12 Amount of received data buffers BFM 14 G 26 5 4 13 Sending sum result BFM 15 G 27 5 4 14 Receiving sum result BFM 16 G 27 5 4 15 Time from CS ON to sending start BFM 20 G 27 5 4 16 Time from actual sending completion to RS OFF BFM 21 G 27 5 4 17 Status BFM 28 G 28 5 4 18 Error code BFM 29 G 29 ...

Page 25: ...Equipment H 12 2 3 Caution on Selection H 23 2 3 1 When using 422BD H 23 2 3 2 When using 232BD or 232ADP H 24 2 3 3 Other cautions H 24 3 Selecting Connection Cables H 25 3 1 Connection Procedure H 25 3 2 Connector Shape in Each Product H 26 3 3 Combinations of Connection Cables H 27 3 3 1 Handy programming panel H 27 3 3 2 Personal computer H 28 4 Connection Cables and Interfaces H 32 4 1 Simpli...

Page 26: ...tion Setting FXGP WIN H 46 6 2 1 Setting communication port and transmission speed H 46 6 3 Communication Test GX Works2 H 47 7 Troubleshooting H 48 7 1 Checking PLC Version Applicability H 48 7 2 Checking Programming Tool Applicability H 48 7 3 Checking Communication Status Based on LED Indication H 48 7 4 Checking Installation H 48 7 5 Checking Parameters in PLC H 48 7 6 Checking Sequence Progra...

Page 27: ...FX PLC and Communication Equipment I 15 3 3 Selecting Modem I 20 3 3 1 List of modems whose operations are confirmed I 21 4 Wiring I 23 4 1 Wiring Procedure I 23 4 2 Connection Diagram I 24 5 How to Setup Modems on the PLC Side I 25 5 1 Setting Using GX Works2 I 25 5 1 1 Setting communication by way of RS 232C port I 25 5 1 2 Modem initialization setting using parameter method I 27 5 1 3 Setting A...

Page 28: ...4 8 3 Checking Communication Status Based on LED Indication I 54 8 4 Checking Installation I 54 8 5 Checking Modem Specifications I 55 8 6 Checking Setting in PLC I 55 8 6 1 Checking parameters in PLC I 55 8 6 2 Checking AT command setting I 56 8 6 3 Checking sequence program I 57 8 7 Checking Programming Tool Setting I 58 8 8 Checking Absence Presence of Errors I 58 8 9 Operation mode display D84...

Page 29: ... FX PLCs as slave stations Protocols in a computer support computer link protocol formats 1 and 4 1 2 5 Application Data acquisition and centralized control Inverter communication Function Communicates with and controls Mitsubishi Electric inverter FREQROL 1 2 6 Application Operation monitoring writing of control values referencing and changing parameters etc MODBUS communication Function Enables ...

Page 30: ...erface system whose master block is an FX PLC 1 2 13 Application Wire conserving network inside control panel and unit MELSEC I O link Function Installs remote I O units near I O equipment in remote locations to conserve wiring Application ON OFF control of I O equipment in a remote location Electronic mail sending Reference subsection Internet mail Function Sends internet mail to personal compute...

Page 31: ... USER S MANUAL For details refer to the FX3U 16CCL M USER S MANUAL For details refer to the FX2N 32CCL USER S MANUAL For details refer to the FX3U 64CCL USER S MANUAL 1 Outline 1 When the master station is an A QnA PLC 2 When the master station is a Q PLC ACPU QnACPU Master station Terminal resistor FXCPU Remote device station Remote I O for CC Link Inverter AC servo etc Sensor solenoid valve etc ...

Page 32: ...station connectivity FX2N 32CCL FX Series intelligent device station connectivity FX3U 64CCL 3 3 Ver 2 20 or later PLC connected through PLC main unit accessed FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC GX Developer QCPU Q mode Ver 8 78G or later Ver 8 72A or later Ver 8 72A or later GX Works2 QCPU Q mode Ver 1 08J or later Ver 1 77F or later Ver 1 08J or later Ver 1 08J or later FXCPU 2 FX3U 16CCL M Ver 1 87R or late...

Page 33: ...rd 4 Function Master station allows connection of remote device station remote I O station inverters AC servos sensors solenoid valves etc supporting the CC Link network to achieve data link FX PLCs are classified as master stations remote device stations or intelligent device stations 5 Applications Decentralized or centralized control of the line reception and sending of information from to the ...

Page 34: ...ct FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Series PLCs to a high order system such as personal computer via Ethernet 100BASE TX or 10BASE T using TCP IP or UDP communication protocol 6 Applications 1 Collects and changes the PLC data Communication using the MELSEC communication protocol 2 Reads writes and verifies programs and monitors and tests device values in the main unit remotely Communicates with GX Work...

Page 35: ...nnected PLCs In the network data can be transferred among PLCs for devices determined in the refresh range and those devices can be monitored by every PLC 5 Applications By this network data link can be achieved in a small scale system and the machine information can be transferred between machines PLC FX2 FX FX2C FX0N FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Communication applicabili...

Page 36: ... devices M and 10 data registers D 5 Applications Information can be transferred between two FX PLCs It is recommended to use the N N Network when connecting two PLCs of the same series among the FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC Series N N Network functionality supports linking of up to eight FX PLC units therefore it offers excellent future expandability options PLC FX2 F...

Page 37: ...FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Series PLCs A Series PLCs and personal computers 4 Function This link allows connection of up to sixteen FX or A including A1FX CPU PLCs to a personal computer for data transfer when the personal computer directly specifies devices in the connected PLCs 5 Applications By this link production inventory etc can be controlled PLC FX2 FX FX2C FX0N FX1S ...

Page 38: ...ordance with RS 485 to control operations and change parameters 5 Applications Operations with up to eight inverters can be controlled from a PLC PLC FX2 FX FX2C FX0N FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Communication applicability PLC FREQROL S500 E500 A500 FREQROL F500 V500 FREQROL F700 A700 FREQROL D700 E700 FREQROL A800 F800 FX2N FX2NC Ver 3 00 or later FX3S Ver 1 00 or later ...

Page 39: ...r code readers printers personal computers micro computer boards measuring instruments etc 4 Function This communication allows non protocol serial communication between equipment with an RS 232C or RS 422 RS 485 interface 5 Applications Communication with a bar code reader printer personal computer micro computer board measuring instrument etc PLC FX2 FX FX2C FX0N FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC FX3S ...

Page 40: ...atible equipment 4 Function This function enables MODBUS communication with MODBUS compatible equipment in accordance with RS 232C or RS 485 5 Applications Line control in the decentralized or centralized method PLC FX2 FX FX2C FX0N FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Communication applicability Ver 1 30 or later Ver 2 40 or later RS 485 RS 485 RS 485 Terminal resistor Terminal r...

Page 41: ...ce with RS 422 programming tool or personal computer 3 Communication equipment operating in accordance with RS 232C personal computer 4 Standard built in port in accordance with USB personal computer FX 10P E FX 20P E FX 30P etc Cable Programming tool RS 422 FXCPU Standard built in port RS 422 Programming tool Personal computer Cable Cable FX 232AWC H FX 232AWC FX 232AW RS 232C RS 422 converter Ca...

Page 42: ...tures of Communication Types 5 Communication equipment operating in accordance with USB personal computer 6 Ethernet adapter personal computer Personal computer Cable USB FXCPU USB Programming tool Cable Cable Cable FXCPU Hub Ethernet Personal computer Programming tool Ethernet adapter FXCPU Ethernet adapter ...

Page 43: ...r to execute sequence programs 5 Applications 1 Programs can be changed and monitored using a personal computer or programming tool 2 A personal computer for changing programs can be directly connected in accordance with RS 232C 3 While the standard programming connector built in an FX PLC is used for connecting a display unit a personal computer or programming tool can be connected at the same ti...

Page 44: ... between a modem on the PLC side and a modem on the personal computer side through a line cellular phone or general subscriber s telephone line for PLC monitoring or transferring from the personal computer The FXGP WIN allows transfer of file data between personal computers 5 Applications By this communication programs in a PLC located in a remote location can be changed and maintained PLC FX2 FX ...

Page 45: ... accordance with the CC Link LT network standard 4 Function This network allows remote control of I O information for sensors lamps etc Input X numbers and output Y numbers can be handled and I O points can be assigned continuously even if 2 point or 4 point type remote I O units are being used 5 Applications Wire conservation for inputs and outputs 6 Detailed information on CC Link LT For product...

Page 46: ...If applicable versions of main units are limited they are described inside Not applicable 3 Communication targets Slave modules for AnyWireASLINK 4 Function This network allows remote control of I O information for sensors and LED 5 Applications Wire conservation for inputs and outputs PLC FX2 FX FX2C FX0N FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Communication applicability Ver 2 20 o...

Page 47: ...applicable 1 FX2NC MT D UL and FX2NC M DSS T DS PLCs are not applicable 3 Communication targets Slave units sensors and actuators for AS i 4 Function This network allows remote control of I O information for sensors and actuators slave units The automatic address assignment function enables easy replacement of a slave unit when it has failed 5 Applications Wire conservation for inputs and outputs ...

Page 48: ...ting sends an electronic mail from a PLC to notify the facility operation status etc to a personal computer or cellular phone which can receive electronic mails This function is applicable through dial up connection to a mail server using a combination of FX 232DOPA and DoPa Mobile Ark9601D by NTT DoCoMo 5 Applications Monitoring of unmanned facilities monitoring of facilities located in distant p...

Page 49: ...s are limited they are described inside Not applicable 3 Communication targets Cellular phones by NTT DoCoMo with a contract for i mode or short mail 4 Function This function sends a short mail from a PLC to notify the facility operation status etc to a cellular phone by NTT DoCoMo which can receive short mails This function is applicable through connection in a line to a Short Mail Center of NTT ...

Page 50: ...A 22 FX Series PLC User s Manual Data Communication Edition Common Items 1 Introduction 1 2 Outline and Features of Communication Types MEMO ...

Page 51: ... types FX PLC main unit FX PLC main unit Link General purpose serial communication Sequence program Electronic mail sending N N Network Parallel link Computer link Inverter communication Ethernet communication Non protocol communication RS RS2 instruction MODBUS communication Ethernet Short mail Remote maintenance Internet mail Programming communication Communication adapter Communication adapter ...

Page 52: ...hen CC Link parameters are set using network parameters 5 Two channels cannot be set at the same time in N N Network and parallel link N N Network and parallel link cannot be used together 6 Only the FX3U 485ADP MB and FX3U 232ADP MB support MODBUS communication 7 The FX3U 128ASL M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N 16CCL M and or FX2N 32ASI M 8 The FX2N 32ASI M cannot be used at the sa...

Page 53: ...cation RS RS2 Instruction G Non Protocol Communication FX 2N 232IF H Programming Communication I Remote Maintenance Apx A Discontinued models Ethernet communication General purpose communication Wire reducing network Sequence program Mail sending Ethernet Non protocol communication CC Link LT AnyWire ASLINK AS i system MELSEC I O LINK Programming Remote maintenance Internet mail sending Product ma...

Page 54: ...link cannot be used together 6 Only the FX3U 485ADP MB and FX3U 232ADP MB support MODBUS communication 7 The FX3U 128ASL M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N 16CCL M and or FX2N 32ASI M 8 The FX2N 32ASI M cannot be used at the same time with the FX3U 16CCL M FX3U 128ASL M and or FX2N 16CCL M 9 Two channels cannot be set at the same time in remote maintenance PLC Communication equipment ...

Page 55: ...ication RS RS2 Instruction G Non Protocol Communication FX 2N 232IF H Programming Communication I Remote Maintenance Apx A Discontinued models Ethernet communication General purpose communication Wire reducing network Sequence program Mail sending Ethernet Non protocol communication CC Link LT AnyWire ASLINK AS i system MELSEC I O LINK Programming Remote maintenance Internet mail sending Product m...

Page 56: ...MB and FX3U 232ADP MB support MODBUS communication 8 For the FX2N 64CL M refer to FX2N 64CL M User s Manual For FX3UC built in CC Link LT master refer to FX3UC Hardware Edition 9 The FX3U 128ASL M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N 16CCL M and or FX2N 32ASI M 10 The FX2N 32ASI M cannot be used at the same time with the FX3U 16CCL M FX3U 128ASL M and or FX2N 16CCL M 11 Two channels canno...

Page 57: ...ion RS RS2 Instruction G Non Protocol Communication FX 2N 232IF H Programming Communication I Remote Maintenance Apx A Discontinued models Ethernet communication General purpose communication Wire reducing network Sequence program Mail sending Ethernet Non protocol communication CC Link LT AnyWire ASLINK AS i system MELSEC I OLINK Programming Remote maintenance Internet mail sending Product manual...

Page 58: ...ported 8 The FX3U 128ASL M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N 16CCL M 9 Two channels cannot be set at the same time in remote maintenance 10 The FX2NC CNV IF or FX3UC 1PS 5V is required to connect the FX3GC PLC PLC Communication equipment Communication specifications Data Link CC Link N N Network Parallel link Computer link Inverter communication MODBUS communication Manual name Obtain ...

Page 59: ...on RS RS2 Instruction G Non Protocol Communication FX 2N 232IF H Programming Communication I Remote Maintenance Apx A Discontinued models Ethernet communication General purpose communication Wire reducing network Sequence program Mail sending Ethernet Non protocol communication CC Link LT AnyWire ASLINK AS i system MELSEC I O LINK Programming Remote maintenance Internet mail sending Product manual...

Page 60: ...2ADP MB support MODBUS communication PLC Communication equipment Communication specifications Data Link CC Link N N Network Parallel link Computer link Inverter communication MODBUS communication Manual name Obtain manuals if necessary Product manual This manual MODBUS Communication Edition FX3S PLC Standard built in port USB FX3G 232 BD RS 232C FX3U 232ADP MB 1 2 FX3G 485 BD RS 485 FX3G 485 BD RJ...

Page 61: ...tocol Communication RS RS2 Instruction G Non Protocol Communication FX 2N 232IF H Programming Communication I Remote Maintenance Apx A Discontinued models Ethernet communication General purpose communication Wire reducing network Sequence program Mail sending Ethernet Non protocol communication CC Link LT AS i system MELSEC I O LINK Programming Remote maintenance Internet mail sending Product manu...

Page 62: ...L and FX2NC M DSS T DS does not support this connection PLC Communication equipment Communication specifications Link CC Link N N Network Parallel link Computer link Inverter communication Manual name Obtain manuals if necessary Product manual This manual FX2N PLC FX2N 232 BD RS 232C FX2NC 232ADP 1 FX0N 232ADP 1 3 FX2N 232IF FX2N 485 BD RS 485 FX2NC 485ADP 1 FX0N 485ADP 1 FX2N 422 BD RS 422 Standa...

Page 63: ...ion RS RS2 Instruction G Non Protocol Communication FX 2N 232IF H Programming Communication I Remote Maintenance Apx A Discontinued models General purpose communication I O link Sequence program Mail sending Non protocol communication CC Link LT AS i system MELSEC I O LINK Programming Remote maintenance Internet mail sending Short mail sending This manual Product manual This manual FX 232DOPA User...

Page 64: ...tion specifications Link CC Link N N Network Parallel link Computer link Inverter communication Manual name Obtain manuals if necessary Product manual This manual FX1S PLC FX1N 232 BD RS 232C FX2NC 232ADP 1 FX0N 232ADP 1 2 FX1N 485 BD RS 485 FX2NC 485ADP 1 FX0N 485ADP 1 FX1N 422 BD RS 422 Standard built in port FX1N PLC FX1N 232 BD RS 232C FX2NC 232ADP 1 FX0N 232ADP 1 2 FX1N 485 BD RS 485 FX2NC 48...

Page 65: ...cation F Non Protocol Communication RS RS2 Instruction G Non Protocol Communication FX 2N 232IF H Programming Communication I Remote Maintenance Apx A Discontinued models General purpose communication I O link Sequence program Mail sending Non protocol communication CC Link LT AS i system MELSEC I O LINK Programming Remote maintenance Internet mail sending This manual Product manual This manual FX...

Page 66: ...nk Computer link Inverter communication Manual name Obtain manuals if necessary Product manual This manual FX0N PLC FX2NC 232ADP RS 232C FX0N 232ADP 1 FX2NC 485ADP RS 485 FX0N 485ADP Standard built in port RS 422 FX2N 16CCL M FX2N 32CCL FX2N 64CL M FX2N 32ASI M FX2N 16LNK M PLC Communication equipment Communication specifications Link CC Link N N Network Parallel link Computer link Inverter commun...

Page 67: ...nication I Remote Maintenance Apx A Discontinued models General purpose communication I O link Sequence program Mail sending Non protocol communication CC Link LT AS i system MELSEC I O LINK Programming Remote maintenance Internet mail sending This manual Product manual This manual FX 232DOPA User s Manual 2 1 General purpose communication I O link Sequence program Mail sending Non protocol commun...

Page 68: ...tocol communication Programming communication Remote maintenance FX0N 232ADP A FX1N 232 BD B FX1N CNV BD B FX2NC 232ADP A 9 pin D Sub male 25 pin D Sub female 9 pin D Sub male RS 485 RS 232C RS 422 Non protocol communication FX1N 422 BD B FX1N CNV BD B FX2NC 485ADP A FX0N 485ADP A 8 pin MINI DIN female M3 terminal block European terminal block FX2NC 485ADP A FX0N 485ADP A FX1N 485 BD B FX1N CNV BD...

Page 69: ...B FX3U 232ADP MB FX3U 232ADP MB FX3U 485ADP MB FX3U 485ADP MB Programming communication Programming communication FX3U Series Either FX3U 232ADP MB FX3U 485ADP MB or FX3U ENET ADP can be selected B C and indicate the mounting position For the mounting procedure refer to the respective communication equipment manual C For special function units blocks refer to the next page A N N Network Parallel l...

Page 70: ...he total current consumption larger than the plc current capacity reduces the number of connectable units For details refer to the respective FX PLC manual and indicate the mounting position For the mounting procedure refer to the respective communication equipment manual FX3U Series A C B A B C Up to 8 units can be selected For remote device station For intelligent device station CC Link LT FX2N ...

Page 71: ...ation Inverter communication Computer link Non protocol communication Programming communication Remote maintenance RS 485 RS 232C RS 422 FX3U 485ADP MB A FX3U 485ADP MB A European terminal block FX3U 232ADP MB A 9 pin D Sub male ch1 FX3U 485ADP MB A ch2 European terminal block European terminal block Non protocol communication FX3U 232ADP MB A ch2 9 pin D Sub male ch1 For special function units bl...

Page 72: ...24V DC or 5V DC power supply of the PLC Accordingly when the total current consumption is larger than the current capacity of the PLC it is necessary to add the power block FX3UC 1PS 5V For details refer to the respective FX PLC manual FX2N 16LNK M MELSEC I O LINK M3 terminal block FX3UC D DS DSS Series For remote For intelligent device station device station CC Link LT FX2N 32CCL M3 terminal bloc...

Page 73: ...MB FX3U 485ADP MB FX3U 232ADP MB FX3U 485ADP MB FX3U 485ADP MB FX3U 232ADP MB For special function units blocks refer to the next page C and indicate the mounting position A B C For the mounting procedure refer to the respective communication equipment manual N N Network Parallel link Computer link Non protocol communication Inverter communication MODBUS communication 1 Programming communication N...

Page 74: ...er supply of the PLC Accordingly when the total current consumption is larger than the current capacity of the PLC it is necessary to add the power block FX3UC 1PS 5V For details refer to the respective FX PLC manual For special adapters with communication type and communication expansion boards refer to the previous page FX3UC 32MT LT 2 C B A Up to 7 units can be selected For remote For intellige...

Page 75: ... B FX3G 232 BD ch1 B FX3G CNV ADP B FX3G 485 BD RJ FX3G CNV ADP A FX3U 485ADP MB ch1 A ch1 A FX3U 232ADP MB ch1 A ch1 FX3U ENET ADP FX3U 485ADP MB and indicate the mounting position For the mounting procedure refer to the respective communication equipment manual For special function units blocks refer to the this section 3 RS 485 European terminal block European terminal block European terminal b...

Page 76: ...ector RJ45 connector RJ45 connector European terminal block 9 pin D Sub male 9 pin D Sub male 9 pin D Sub male 9 pin D Sub male N N Network Parallel link Computer link Non protocol communication Inverter communication MODBUS communication 2 Non protocol communication Computer link MODBUS communication 2 Non protocol communication Programming communication Remote maintenance Programming communicati...

Page 77: ...ew size is M3 5 in the FX2N 16CCL M 5 The FX3U 128ASL M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N 16CCL M Limitation in the number of connectable units Connected special function units blocks operate using the 24V DC or 5V DC power supply of the PLC Accordingly the number of connectable units depends on the system configuration For details refer to the respective FX PLC manual For the mounting...

Page 78: ...efer to the next page B and indicate the mounting position A B For the mounting procedure refer to the respective communication equipment manual N N Network Parallel link Computer link Non protocol communication Inverter communication MODBUS communication 1 European terminal block European terminal block European terminal block European terminal block 9 pin D Sub male 9 pin D Sub male Computer lin...

Page 79: ... the same time with the FX2N 16CCL M Limitation in the number of connectable units Connected special function units blocks operate using the 24V DC or 5V DC power supply of the PLC Accordingly when the total current consumption is larger than the current capacity of the PLC it is necessary to add the power block FX3UC 1PS 5V For details refer to the respective FX PLC manual FX3GC Series For remote...

Page 80: ...422 RS 232C For special function units blocks are not connectable FX3S Series and indicate the mounting position For the mounting procedure refer to the respective communication equipment manual Modular jack Non protocol communication N N Network Parallel link Computer link Non protocol communication Inverter communication MODBUS communication 1 European terminal block European terminal block Euro...

Page 81: ...protocol communication Programming communication Remote maintenance Short mail sending FX0N 232ADP A FX2N 232 BD B FX2N CNV BD B FX2NC 232ADP A 9 pin D Sub male 25 pin D Sub female 9 pin D Sub male RS 485 RS 232C RS 422 Non protocol communication FX2N 422 BD B FX2N CNV BD B FX2NC 485ADP A FX0N 485ADP A 8 pin MINI DIN female M3 terminal block European terminal block European terminal block M3 termi...

Page 82: ...e respective FX PLC manual For special adapters with communication type communication expansion board and function extension memory cassettes refer to the previous page FX2N Series A C D B Up to 8 units can be selected CC Link Non protocol communication For master station For remote device station CC Link LT C FX2N 16CCL M 1 FX2N 32CCL C FX2N 232IF C POWER SD RD FX2N 16LNK M C M3 5 terminal block ...

Page 83: ...k Non protocol communication Inverter communication Computer link Non protocol communication Programming communication Short mail sending RS 485 RS 232C RS 422 Non protocol communication FX2NC 485ADP A FX0N 485ADP A European terminal block M3 terminal block FX0N 232ADP A FX2NC 232ADP A 9 pin D Sub male 25 pin D Sub male FX2NC 485ADP A FX0N 485ADP A European terminal block M3 terminal block FX2NC S...

Page 84: ...onnectable units For details refer to the respective FX PLC manual FX2NC Series A C D Up to 4 units can be selected CC Link Non protocol communication For master station For remote device station CC Link LT C FX2N 16CCL M 1 FX2N 32CCL C FX2N 232IF C POWER SD RD FX2N 64CL M C FX2N 16LNK M C M3 5 terminal block M3 terminal block 9 pin D Sub male Dedicated connector M3 terminal block For special adap...

Page 85: ...uter link Non protocol communication Programming communication Computer link Non protocol communication Programming communication Remote maintenance FX0N 232ADP A FX1N 232 BD B FX1N CNV BD B FX2NC 232ADP A 9 pin D Sub male 25 pin D Sub female 9 pin D Sub male RS 485 RS 232C RS 422 Non protocol communication FX1N 422 BD B FX1N CNV BD B FX2NC 485ADP A FX0N 485ADP A M3 terminal block European termina...

Page 86: ...onfiguration For details refer to the respective FX PLC manual For special adapters with communication type and communication expansion boards refer to the previous page Up to 8 units can be selected FX1N Series A C B CC Link For master station For remote device station CC Link LT C FX2N 16CCL M 1 E R R O R CC Link FX2N 16CCL M FX2N 32CCL C FX2N 64CL M C FX2N 16LNK M C M3 5 terminal block M3 termi...

Page 87: ...X1NC Series FX1NC Series A C One line can be selected N N Network Parallel link Computer link Non protocol communication Computer link Non protocol communication Programming communication Remote maintenance RS 485 RS 232C RS 422 Non protocol communication FX2NC 485ADP A FX0N 485ADP A European terminal block M3 terminal block FX0N 232ADP A FX2NC 232ADP A 9 pin D Sub male 25 pin D Sub female FX2NC 4...

Page 88: ... the system configuration For details refer to the respective FX PLC manual FX1NC Series A C Up to 2 units can be selected CC Link For master station For remote device station CC Link LT C FX2N 16CCL M 1 FX2N 32CCL C FX2N 64CL M C FX2N 16LNK M C M3 5 terminal block M3 terminal block Dedicated connector M3 terminal block MELSEC I O LINK C FX2NC CNV IF E R R O R CC Link FX2N 16CCL M For special adap...

Page 89: ...tion Programming communication Computer link Non protocol communication Programming communication Remote maintenance RS 485 RS 232C RS 422 Non protocol communication FX1N 422 BD B FX1N CNV BD B FX2NC 485ADP A FX0N 485ADP A 8 pin MINI DIN female M3 terminal block European terminal block FX2NC 485ADP A FX0N 485ADP A FX1N 485 BD B FX1N CNV BD B European terminal block M3 terminal block European termi...

Page 90: ...e A C FX0N Series One line can be selected N N Network Parallel link Computer link Non protocol communication Computer link Non protocol communication RS 485 RS 232C RS 422 Non protocol communication A C For the mounting procedure refer to the respective communication equipment manual FX2NC 485ADP A FX0N 485ADP A European terminal block M3 terminal block FX0N 232ADP A FX2NC 232ADP A 9 pin D Sub ma...

Page 91: ...ate using the 24V DC or 5V DC power supply of the PLC Therefore the total current consumption larger than the plc current capacity reduces the number of connectable units For details refer to the respective FX PLC manual For special adapters with communication type refer to the previous page A C FX0N Series A Up to 4 units can be selected CC Link For remote device station FX2N 32CCL C FX2N 16LNK M...

Page 92: ...erence FX2 FX FX2C Series One line can be selected Computer link Computer link Non protocol communication RS 485 RS 232C Parallel link FX2 40AP A FX2 40AW A M3 5 terminal block Connector for optical fiber FX 485ADP A M3 5 terminal block FX 232ADP A 25 pin D Sub female Dedicated Dedicated Parallel link A indicate the mounting position A For the mounting procedure refer to the respective communicati...

Page 93: ... program to the PLC Caution Regardless of the method chosen above a PLC operates the same way If both methods are selected priority is given to the method using parameters 2 Communication setting method availability in each FX PLC 1 Only ch1 and ch2 are available 3 Setting flow FX Series FX2 FX FX2C FX0N FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Parameter method 1 Program method Sequen...

Page 94: ...he settings using parameters in the programming tool When the PLC power is turned ON the contents of the parameters are automatically transferred to the PLC As soon as the parameters are transferred to the PLC the settings become valid 2 Directly specifying the settings in a sequence program To enable the settings write data after turning the PLC mode to RUN from STOP and then reboot the PLC s pow...

Page 95: ...edure refer to GX Developer Operating Manual For details on FX 30P operating procedure refer to FX 30P Operation Manual 3 2 1 Operating procedure With GX Works2 open follow the steps in this section for activating the serial communication setting method 1 Opening the parameter setting window In the project view area of the navigation window double click Parameter PLC Parameter If the navigation wi...

Page 96: ...ecuted in this setting This communication is not executed in this setting This communication is not executed in this setting This communication is not executed in this setting This communication is not executed in this setting This communication is not executed in this setting This communication is not executed in this setting This communication is not executed in this setting This communication i...

Page 97: ...P WIN Ch0 and Ch 2 cannot be set using FXGP WIN For details on GX Works2 operating procedure refer to section 3 2 For details on GX Developer operating procedure refer to GX Developer Operating Manual For details on FX 30P operating procedure refer to FX 30P Operation Manual 3 3 1 Operating procedure This subsection explains the serial communication setting method Suppose that FXGP WIN is already ...

Page 98: ...tion Setting in the FX Series 3 3 Communication Setting in Parameter Method FXGP WIN 2 When there are already parameter settings There is communication setting Confirm the setting contents When using programming communication parallel link N N Network or remote maintenance click the Clear button ...

Page 99: ...ion Remote maintenance Remarks Protocol Non protocol communication This communication is not executed in this setting This communication is not executed in this setting This communication is not executed in this setting This communication is not executed in this setting This communication is not executed in this setting This communication is not executed in this setting This communication is not e...

Page 100: ...munication port channel When the FX3U ENET ADP is used one communication port is occupied Only one FX3U ENET ADP unit can be connected at the last stage left end of the main unit and special adapters For details refer to FX3U ENET ADP User s Manual 3 4 1 Extension of Port For FX3G FX3GC PLC 1 For FX3G PLC 40 point 60 point type The communication expansion board connected to the option connector 1 ...

Page 101: ...munication expansion board 2 For FX3G PLC 14 point 24 point type One communication port channel can be connected to the FX3G PLC main unit 14 point and 24 point type It is not allowed to connect two communication special adapters 3 For FX3GC PLC Standard built in port RS 422 ch0 Communication expansion board ch1 Communication expansion board ch2 Communication special adapter ch1 Analog special ada...

Page 102: ...C D DS DSS PLC 3 For FX3UC 32MT LT 2 PLC When using a communication expansion board When using two communication special and a communication special adapter together adapters POWER FX3U 4AD ADP POWER FX3U 4AD ADP POWER FX3U 4AD ADP POWER FX3U 4AD ADP Communication special adapter ch2 Analog special adapter Communication expansion board ch1 Analog special adapter Communication special adapter ch2 C...

Page 103: ...ot be set for non protocol communication RS instruction 2 When using remote maintenance on ch2 use GX Works2 or GX Developer For applicable versions of GX Works2 and GX Developer refer to I Remote Maintenance Subsection 1 4 1 or 1 4 2 Example 1 When parallel link is set for ch1 the N N Network cannot be set for ch2 Example 2 When computer link is set for ch1 the N N Network can be set for ch2 R D ...

Page 104: ... unit can be checked from the manufacturer s serial number S N indicated on the label adhered to the right side of the product Right side Example nameplate manufacture s serial number 1010001 Year Example 2009 Last digit of year Year Example 2010 Last two digit of year 0 1 1 0 0 0 Control number Product from January 2010 Product during December 2009 or earlier 1 Month Example Jan 1 to 9 January to...

Page 105: ...2 Version check The PLC version can be checked by reading the last three digits of device D8001 Main unit LOT indication adoption time FX3S Series PLC March 2013 and later From first product FX3G Series PLC October 2008 and later FX3GC Series PLC January 2012 and later From first product FX3U Series PLC January 2009 and later FX3UC Series PLC January 2009 and later Example FX3U 48MR ES Product dur...

Page 106: ...etting method cable connection program examples and troubleshooting for each communication type Separate manual PLC Wiring and installation of PLC HARDWARE MANUAL HANDY MANUAL which is supplied with each product User s Manual for FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC Sequence program PROGRAMMING MANUAL Supplied with Separate manual Separate manual Communication equipment Installation and name of each par...

Page 107: ...FX3UC PLCs Manual name Manual number Included separate document Contents Manuals for PLC main unit FX3U Series For detailed explanation refer to the FX3U Series User s Manual Hardware Edition FX3U Series Hardware Manual JY997D50301 Included I O specifications wiring and installation of the PLC main unit FX3U extracted from the FX3U Series User s Manual Hardware Edition FX3U Series User s Manual Ha...

Page 108: ...ardware including the specifications wiring and installation procedure FX2NC Series FX2NC DSS DS Series HARDWARE MANUAL JY992D76401 Included Describes the contents of the FX2NC DSS DS PLC hardware including the specifications wiring and installation procedure FX2NC D UL Series HARDWARE MANUAL JY992D87201 Included Describes the contents of the FX2NC D UL PLC hardware including the specifications wi...

Page 109: ...eparate manual Explains instructions applicable in the FX1S FX1N FX2N FX1NC and FX2NC PLCs FX0 FX0S FX0N FX1 FX2 FX2C PROGRAMMING MANUAL JY992D48301 Separate manual Explains instructions available in the FX0 FX0S FX0N FX1 FX2 FX2C PLCs MELSEC Q L F Structured Programming Manual Fundamentals SH080782 Separate manual Programming methods specifications functions etc required to create structured prog...

Page 110: ...llation procedure FX3U 232ADP MB INSTALLATION MANUAL JY997D26401 Included Describes the contents of the RS 232C communication special adapter FX3U 232ADP MB hardware including the specifications and installation procedure FX2NC 232ADP INSTALLATION MANUAL JY997D01101 Included Describes the contents of the RS 232C communication special adapter FX2NC 232ADP hardware including the specifications and i...

Page 111: ... procedure FX1N 485 BD USER S GUIDE JY992D84201 Included Describes the contents of the RS 485 communication expansion board FX1N 485 BD hardware including the specifications and installation procedure FX3U 485ADP INSTALLATION MANUAL JY997D13801 Included Describes the contents of the RS 485 communication special adapter FX3U 485ADP hardware including the specifications and installation procedure FX...

Page 112: ...dware including the installation procedure Connector conversion adapter FX3G CNV ADP INSTALLATION MANUAL JY997D32301 Included Describes the contents of the FX3G CNV ADP special adapter connection conversion adapter hardware including the installation procedure FX3S CNV ADP INSTALLATION MANUAL JY997D48801 Included Describes the contents of the FX3S CNV ADP special adapter connection conversion adap...

Page 113: ... name of FX3S Series PLC main units FX2N Series Generic name of FX2N Series PLCs FX2N PLC or main unit Generic name of FX2N Series PLC main units FX2NC Series Generic name of FX2NC Series PLCs FX2NC PLC or main unit Generic name of FX2NC M T FX2NC MT D UL and FX2NC M DSS T DS Series PLC main units FX2NC M T PLC FX2NC 16MR T FX2NC 16MT FX2NC 32MT FX2NC 64MT and FX2NC 96MT FX2NC MT D UL PLC FX2NC 16...

Page 114: ...pansion board Expansion board Generic name of input output expansion board communication expansion boards special adapter connection boards analog expansion boards and analog potentiometer expansion boards Input output expansion board Generic name of input output expansion board 4EX BD FX3G 4EX BD 2EYT BD FX3G 2EYT BD Communication expansion board or communication board Generic name of communicati...

Page 115: ...nk LT CC Link equipment Generic name of CC Link master station and CC Link remote device stations and CC Link intelligent device stations CC Link master station Generic name of CC Link master station with model name FX2N 16CCL M or FX3U 16CCL M CC Link remote station Generic name of remote I O stations and remote device stations CC Link intelligent device station Generic name of CC Link intelligen...

Page 116: ...es Generic name of GOT F900 Series Internet mail sending tools Mail sending units Generic name of FX 232DOPA mail sending units FX 232DOPA FX 232DOPA mail sending main units Only Japanese manual is available for this product These products can only be used in Japan Abbreviation generic name Name Inverters FREQROL inverter Generic name of Mitsubishi Electric F800 A800 F700 A700 E700 D700 V500 F500 ...

Page 117: ...ation of Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Windows XP Abbreviation of Microsoft Windows XP Professional and Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Windows Vista Abbreviation of Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Operating System Microsoft Windows Vi...

Page 118: ...A 90 FX Series PLC User s Manual Data Communication Edition Common Items 6 Abbreviations Generic Names and Terms Used in This Manual 5 2 Introduction of Related Manuals MEMO ...

Page 119: ...explains the N N Network provided for the MELSEC F FX Series Programmable Controllers and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any ...

Page 120: ...B 2 FX Series PLC User s Manual Data Communication Edition N N Network ...

Page 121: ...with RS 485 Communication equipment operating in accordance with RS 485 FX PLC FX PLC FX PLC Master station Slave station No 1 Slave station No 2 500 m 1640 5 50 m 164 0 when 485BD is included 8 units Number of linked units Total extension distance For the specifications refer to Chapter 2 Bit devices M1000 to M1063 M1064 to M1127 M1128 to M1191 M1448 to M1511 Word devices D0 to D7 D10 to D17 D20 ...

Page 122: ...ng twisted cables Wiring example Based on SD RD lamp lighting status and contents of error check devices verify that communication is normally executed If there is abnormality refer to the troubleshooting Chapter 9 Refer to Chapter 8 Outline of system Applicable PLC versions Applicable programming tools Outline Refer to Chapter 1 Turn ON power Programming tool Connect PLC 1 Perform PLC communicati...

Page 123: ...3 How to look at the manufacturer s serial number The year and month of production of the PLC main unit can be checked on the nameplate and LOT indicated on the front of the product For a detailed description of the How to look at the manufacturer s serial number refer to A Common Items Section 4 1 1 3 4 Products whose production was stopped Production was stopped for some models of MELSEC F Serie...

Page 124: ...play units for applicable models and versions supporting the list editor function FX3S PLC GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 E Ver 1 492N or later FX 30P Ver 1 50 or later GOT1000 Series display units Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable models and versions supporting the list editor function FX2N and FX2NC PLCs GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 E Ver 1 08J or later GX Developer SW D5C F GPPW E...

Page 125: ...Series display units Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable models and versions supporting the list editor function FX3GC PLC GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 J Ver 1 77F or later FX 30P Ver 1 30 or later GOT1000 Series display units Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable models and versions supporting the list editor function FX3S PLC GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 J...

Page 126: ...0P MFXD Ver 5 00 or later FX 10P SET0 Ver 4 00 or later GOT F900 Series display units F940WGOT TWD F940GOT WD F940GOT BD H F940GOT BD RH F940WGOT TWD Ver 1 00 or later F940GOT LWD F940GOT SWD Ver 1 00 or later F940GOT LBD H F940GOT SBD H Ver 1 00 or later F940GOT LBD RH F940GOT SBD RH Ver 1 00 or later GOT1000 Series display units Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable mod...

Page 127: ...ation Specifications Reference Communication is executed according to the fixed specifications shown in the table below Specification items such as baud rate cannot be changed Item Specifications Remarks Number of connectable units 8 maximum Transmission standard RS 485 standard Maximum total extension distance 500 m 1640 5 or less 50 m 164 0 or less when 485BD is included in system Distance varie...

Page 128: ...FX3G FX3GC Series FX3S Series FX2N FX2NC Series FX1N FX1NC Series FX1S Series FX0N Series Station No Pattern 0 Pattern 1 Pattern 2 Bit device M Word device D Bit device M Word device D Bit device M Word device D 0 4 in each station 32 in each station 4 in each station 64 in each station 8 in each station Master station Station No 0 D 0 to D 3 M1000 to M1031 D 0 to D 3 M1000 to M1063 D 0 to D 7 Sla...

Page 129: ...emote Maintenance Apx A Discontinued models 2 2 2 Link time The link time indicates the cycle time in which link devices are updated The link time varies depending on the number of linked units master station and slave stations and the number of linked devices as shown in the table below Unit ms Number of linked stations Pattern 0 Pattern 1 Pattern 2 0 bit devices 4 word devices 32 bit devices 4 w...

Page 130: ...on equipment operating in accordance with RS 485 FX PLC Communication board Communication adapter Special adapter connection board This is the communication board built into the PLC reducing the installation area Important point in selection Attach the special adapter connection board to the main unit and then attach the communication adapter to the left side of the main unit Total extension dista...

Page 131: ...are different between the units shown in FX2NC 485ADP FX0N 485ADP Select either one In the table below only the cable is different between the units shown in FX3G 485 BD FX3G 485 BD RJ Select either one N N Network is not provided for the FX1 FX2 FX FX2C FX0 and FX0S PLCs FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX0N 500 m 1640 5 FX1S 50 m 164 0 500 m 1640 5 FX1N 50 ...

Page 132: ...quipment works as ch1 when connected to the option connector 1 50 m 164 0 500 m 1640 5 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX3G 485 BD European terminal block FX3G 485 BD RJ RJ45 connector FX3S CNV ADP FX3U 485ADP MB European terminal block FX3G 485 BD European terminal block FX3G 485 BD RJ RJ45 connector FX3G CNV ADP FX3U 485ADP MB European terminal block ch1 c...

Page 133: ...g channel 2 ch 2 The communication equipment works as ch2 when connected to the option connector 2 50 m 164 0 Ch2 is not available when the FX3G 8AV BD FX3G 4EX BD or FX3G 2EYT BD is connected to the option connector 2 500 m 1640 5 FX3U When using channel 1 ch 1 50 m 164 0 500 m 1640 5 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check ch2 ch2 FX3G 485 BD European terminal blo...

Page 134: ...hen using channel 1 ch 1 500 m 1640 5 When using channel 2 ch 2 500 m 1640 5 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX3U 485ADP MB European terminal block ch2 FX3U BD Where represents 232 422 485 USB and 8AV ch1 R D S D FX3U CNV BD FX3U 232ADP MB FX3U 485ADP MB FX3U CF ADP ch1 FX3U 485ADP MB European terminal block ch2 FX2NC 485ADP European terminal block FX0N 485A...

Page 135: ...UC 32MT LT 2 When using channel 1 ch 1 50 m 164 0 500 m 1640 5 When using channel 2 ch 2 When a FX3U 8AV BD is used it occupies one communication port channel 500 m 1640 5 When a FX3U CF ADP is used it occupies one communication port channel 500 m 1640 5 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX3U 485ADP MB European terminal block ch1 FX3U 232ADP MB FX3U 485ADP MB ...

Page 136: ...surge induction are likely to take place As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or high voltage lines 2 Ground the shield wire or shield of the shielded cable at one point on the PLC However do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems Make sure to properly wire the terminal block in accordance with the following precautions Failure ...

Page 137: ...ASE T cable Category 3 or higher 2 Connection specifications Straight type 3 Connector RJ45 connector Connector with metal frame is used 2 Cautions on using commercial cables Pay attention to the following point when purchasing commercial cables Use shielded cables Make sure to connect the shield to the metal frame of the connector and perform class D grounding Manufacturer Model name Remarks Mits...

Page 138: ...le When using a bar terminal with insulating sleeve Because it is difficult to insert a cable into an insulating sleeve depending on the thickness of the cable sheath select the proper cable according to the outline drawing Reference 1 Old model name CRIMPFOX ZA 3 2 Old model name CRIMPFOX UD 6 Cable size when one cable is connected Cable size when two cables are connected Bar terminal with Insula...

Page 139: ...ately 25mm 0 98 Reference FX3U 485 BD FX3G 485 BD FX3U 485ADP MB FX3G 485 BD RJ FX2N 485 BD FX1N 485 BD FX2NC 485ADP 2 Terminal block In the FX0N 485ADP and FX 485ADP the terminal screw size is M3 Make sure to use a crimp style terminal with the following sizes Make sure that the tightening torque is 0 5 to 0 8 N m Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above mentioned range Fail...

Page 140: ...X3U 485ADP MB FX3G 485 BD Remove the upper terminal block before changing over the switch in the FX3G 485 BD Removal Loosen the terminal block mounting screws and remove the terminal block Installation Attach the terminal block and tighten the terminal block mounting screws Tightening torque 0 4 to 0 5 N m Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above mentioned range Failure to do...

Page 141: ...X2N 485 BD FX1N 485 BD FX3U 485ADP MB SDA TXD SDB TXD RDA RXD RDB RXD SG FX0N 485ADP SDA TXD SDB TXD RDA RXD RDB RXD LINK SG FG 2 Terminal resistor 110 SDA TXD SDB TXD RDA RXD RDB RXD SG 3 3 Make sure to perform Class D grounding on the shield of a twisted pair cable connected to the FX2N 485 BD FX1N 485 BD FX3U 485 BD FX3G 485 BD FX2NC 485ADP or FX3U 485ADP MB FG Make sure to connect the terminal...

Page 142: ...ibutor BMJ 8 BMJ 8 28N No internal connection of the No 2 and 8 pin Do not use a plug with terminal resistor HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO LTD FX3G 485 BD RJ FX3G 485 BD RJ Class D grounding Distributor BMJ 8 Terminal resistor selector switch 110Ω 2 5 Terminal resistor selector switch Open Class D grounding Class D grounding Class D grounding 4 3 6 1 RDA RDB SDA SDB SG 1 1 1 1 1 2 Terminal resistor 2 Termin...

Page 143: ...ated below The grounding resistance should be 100 or less Independent grounding should be performed for best results When independent grounding can not be performed perform shared grounding as shown in the following figure For details refer to the Hardware Edition of each series The grounding wire size should be AWG 14 2 mm2 or larger The grounding point should be close to the PLC and all groundin...

Page 144: ...cation setting is not provided 2 When the value of D8120 D8400 D8420 is any value other than 0 The communication setting is provided 2 Checking absence presence of parameter setting Check for the absence presence using the GX Works2 GX Developer FXGP WIN or FX 30P 1 GX Works2 operating procedure For details refer to Section 5 2 2 FXGP WIN operating procedure For details refer to Section 5 3 For de...

Page 145: ...P WIN operating procedure refer to section 5 3 For details on GX Developer operating procedure refer to GX Developer Operating Manual For details on FX 30P operating procedure refer to FX 30P Operation Manual 5 2 1 Operating procedure This subsection explains the serial communication setting method Suppose that GX Works2 is already started up 1 Opening the parameter setting window In the project v...

Page 146: ...FX 30P Operation Manual 5 3 1 Operating procedure This subsection explains the serial communication setting method Suppose that FXGP WIN is already started up 1 Adjusting serial setting parameter Double click Option Serial setting parameter from the toolbar The following dialog box appears according to absence presence of parameter settings 1 When there are no parameter settings The dialog box sho...

Page 147: ...rring the program to each PLC Turn ON the power to each PLC and transfer the program 3 Validating the communication setting When the PLC is in RUN mode set it to STOP mode once and then set it to RUN mode again Or turn OFF the power of the master station and all slave stations in communication and then turn ON the power of these stations at the same time 4 Confirming flashing of the communication ...

Page 148: ...013 3 Slave station No 3 X000 to X003 D30 Y014 to Y017 4 Slave station No 4 X000 to X003 D40 Y020 to Y023 5 Slave station No 5 X000 to X003 D50 Y024 to Y027 6 Slave station No 6 X000 to X003 D60 Y030 to Y033 7 Slave station No 7 X000 to X003 D70 Y034 to Y037 Set the inputs X000 to X003 to ON or OFF Master station Slave station No 1 Confirm that the inputs X000 to X003 in the slave station No 2 tur...

Page 149: ...mming tool Example Change K1Y004 to K1M4 2 In the circuit from step 34 create a program for link devices MOV instruction for all connected slave stations M8038 FNC 12 MOV K0 D8176 0 FNC 12 MOV K2 D8177 FNC 12 MOV K0 D8178 FNC 12 MOV K3 D8179 FNC 12 MOV K5 D8180 M8000 FNC 12 MOV K1X000 D0 FNC 12 MOV D10 K1Y004 END M8000 FNC 12 MOV D20 K1Y010 28 34 FNC 12 MOV D70 K1Y034 Set the number of slave stati...

Page 150: ...rom K1 to K7 Step for writing information from a slave station slave station master station Transfer the contents of X000 to X003 in this slave station to a link device The link device varies depending on the station number The table below shows the link devices to be used Steps for reading information from another slave station another slave stations this slave station By using link devices read ...

Page 151: ...for absence presence of N N Network program also Do not set this device to ON in the sequence program M8179 Channel setting Set the channel of the communication port to be used in the FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC When OUT M8179 program does not exist ch 1 When OUT M8179 program exists ch 2 D8176 Station number settings Set the station number used in the N N Network Master station 0 slave station 1 to...

Page 152: ...ons will not operate normally Device Name Description FX0N FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC M504 M8183 Master station data transfer sequence error This device turns ON when a data transfer sequence error occurs in the master station M505 to M511 1 M8184 to M8190 2 Slave station data transfer sequence error This device turns ON when a data transfer sequence error occurs in a sl...

Page 153: ...arameter setting FNC 12 MOV K0 D8176 FNC 12 MOV K2 D8177 FNC 12 MOV K1 D8178 FNC 12 MOV K3 D8179 FNC 12 MOV K5 D8180 0 Make sure to start the program for setting the N N Network from step 0 Program for setting the N N Network Station number setting 0 master station Station number 0 indicates the master station Slave station quantity setting 2 2 slave stations Set the number of connected slave stat...

Page 154: ... read them Program for reading link devices master station slave station The information from M1064 link device is read to M0 The information from M1065 link device is read to Y011 The information from M1066 link device is read to M15 The information from M1070 to M1085 link devices is read to Y020 to Y037 The information from D10 link device is read to D110 M8184 M8185 M8191 Station No 1 Data tra...

Page 155: ...mote Maintenance Apx A Discontinued models For details on link devices refer to Section 7 1 For cautions on program creation refer to Section 7 4 Station No 2 Data transfer sequence error M1128 M1129 M1130 M8185 FNC 12 MOV K4M1140 K4M20 FNC 12 MOV D20 D200 Y012 M1 M18 The information from M1128 link device is read to M1 The information from M1129 link device is read to Y012 The information from M1...

Page 156: ...s in station No 0 Y000 is set to ON This program is required to write information from a slave station to the master station or another slave station The information from X000 is written to M1064 link device The information from X002 is written to M1065 link device The information from M10 is written to M1066 link device The information from M100 to M115 is written to M1070 to M1085 link devices T...

Page 157: ...0 M8185 FNC 12 MOV K4M1140 K4M20 FNC 12 MOV D20 D200 Program for reading link devices slave station master or slave station This program is required to read information from the master station or another slave station to a slave station Monitor link errors in each slave station and read them M0 M15 M1 M18 The information from M1000 link device is read to M0 The information from M1001 link device i...

Page 158: ... status just before occurrence of the link error Create a fail safe program which does not cause abnormality even if a link error occurs 4 Cautions on using FX0N FX1S PLCs 1 Link pattern when FX0N FX1S PLCs are used or included When FX0N FX1S PLCs are included in the system make sure to set pattern 0 in D8178 refresh range setting If any other pattern is set data transfer error occurs in all FX0N ...

Page 159: ...stination and contents Bit device link 1 Master station Inputs X000 to X003 M1000 to M1003 Slave station No 1 Outputs Y010 to Y013 Slave station No 2 Outputs Y010 to Y013 2 Slave station No 1 Inputs X000 to X003 M1064 to M1067 Master station Outputs Y014 to Y017 Slave station No 2 Outputs Y014 to Y017 3 Slave station No 2 Inputs X000 to X003 M1128 to M1131 Master station Outputs Y020 to Y023 Slave...

Page 160: ...ror indication program Because the master station does not recognize errors within itself the master station programs for errors within itself are not required System device Master station Station No 1 Station No 2 Contents D8176 K 0 K 1 K 2 Station number settings D8177 K 2 Total number of slave stations 2 D8178 K 2 Refresh range Pattern 2 D8179 K 5 Number of retries 5 D8180 K 7 Monitoring time 7...

Page 161: ...ration 8 Operation 5 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 3 Operation 4 Data transfer sequence error in slave station No 1 M8184 MOV K 10 D 0 Data transfer sequence error in slave station No 2 M8185 MOV K 10 D 2 C2 contact of slave station No 2 M1140 Y006 Data transfer sequence error in slave station No 2 M8185 END ADD D 20 D 3 D 10 RUN monitor MOV K1X000 K1M1000 M8000 Data transfer sequence error in...

Page 162: ...gram error indication program and operation program 1 Parameter setting program 2 Error indication program Because slave station No 1 does not recognize errors within itself slave station No 1 programs for errors within itself are not required Parameter setting M8038 Station number settings 1 slave station No 1 0 FNC 12 MOV K 1 D8176 Make sure to start from step 0 M8183 Data transfer sequence erro...

Page 163: ...x A Discontinued models 3 Operation program Master station Data transfer sequence error M8183 MOV K1M1000 K1Y010 Counter reset Counter input X000 C 1 RST C 1 MOV K1X000 K1M1064 MOV K1M1128 K1Y020 Data transfer sequence error in slave station No 2 M8185 D 1 C 1 Y005 M1070 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 3 Operation 4 X001 Data transfer sequence error in slave station No 2 Data transfer sequence e...

Page 164: ...gram error indication program and operation program 1 Parameter setting program 2 Error indication program Because slave station No 2 does not recognize errors within itself slave station No 2 programs for errors within itself are not required Parameter setting M8038 Station number settings 2 slave station No 2 0 FNC 12 MOV K 2 D8176 Make sure to start from step 0 M8183 Data transfer sequence erro...

Page 165: ...x A Discontinued models 3 Operation program Master station Data transfer sequence error M8183 MOV K1M1000 K1Y010 Counter reset RST C 2 MOV K1M1064 K1Y014 MOV K1X000 K1M1128 Data transfer sequence error in slave station No 1 M8184 Y005 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 3 Slave Station No 1 C1 contact Data transfer sequence error in slave station No 1 M8184 M1070 Operation 4 X001 MOV K 10 D 20 Count...

Page 166: ... Verify that the wiring to all communication equipment is correct If the communication equipment is wired incorrectly communication is not possible For wiring method check refer to Chapter 4 9 4 Checking Sequence Program 1 Communication setting in the sequence program Verify that the parallel link is not set Using both the parallel link and the N N Network at the same time is not allowed Verify th...

Page 167: ... the communication function is not available in ch2 Use ch1 or delete these instructions After deleting these instructions reboot the PLC s power 3 In FX3U and FX3UC PLCs Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program If these instructions are used in the program the communication function is not available in ch1 Use ch2 or delete these instructions After deleting these ins...

Page 168: ...mode is switched from STOP to RUN 9 6 Checking Absence Presence of Data Transfer Errors Verify that link errors have not occurred in the master station and slave stations Link errors can be checked using the flags specified below 9 6 1 Check while data transfer sequence is being executed While the N N Network is being executed the data transfer sequence ON flag remains ON Verify that the device sp...

Page 169: ...ve station No 5 Slave station No 6 Slave station No 7 FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC M8183 M8184 M8185 M8186 M8187 M8188 M8189 M8190 FX0N FX1S M504 M505 M506 M507 M508 M509 M510 M511 FX Series Master station Slave station No 1 Slave station No 2 Slave station No 3 Slave station No 4 Slave station No 5 Slave station No 6 Slave station No 7 FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3...

Page 170: ... L 1 An unexpected slave station responded to the sending request by the master station Station number settings 23H Counter error L L 1 The counter value included in the parameter data is different from the counter value given by a slave station Wiring 31H Parameter not received L L 2 Before parameters had been received sending request was received from the master station Wiring and power supply E...

Page 171: ...king Absence Presence of Data Transfer Errors A Common Items B N N Network C Parallel Link D Computer Link E Inverter Communication F Non Protocol Communication RS RS2 Instruction G Non Protocol Communication FX 2N 232IF H Programming Communication I Remote Maintenance Apx A Discontinued models MEMO ...

Page 172: ...channel to be used in the FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC M L R W Devices for checking communication status M8063 Serial communication error 1 ch 1 Turns ON when abnormality occurs in serial communication using ch 1 M L R M8438 Serial communication error 2 ch 2 Turns ON when abnormality occurs in serial communication using ch 2 in the FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC M L R M8183 Data transfer sequence error Tu...

Page 173: ... Inverter Communication F Non Protocol Communication RS RS2 Instruction G Non Protocol Communication FX 2N 232IF H Programming Communication I Remote Maintenance Apx A Discontinued models Master station Slave station No 1 Slave station No 2 Slave station No 3 Slave station No 4 Slave station No 5 Slave station No 6 Slave station No 7 M8184 M8185 M8186 M8187 M8188 M8189 M8190 ...

Page 174: ...C FX3U and FX3UC M L R Devices for communication setting D8176 Corresponding station number settings Provided to set the station number 0 M L R W D8177 Slave station quantity setting Provided to set the number of slave stations used in communication 7 M R W D8178 Refresh range setting Provided to set the refresh range 0 M R W D8179 Number of retries Provided to set the number of retry times 3 M R ...

Page 175: ...on F Non Protocol Communication RS RS2 Instruction G Non Protocol Communication FX 2N 232IF H Programming Communication I Remote Maintenance Apx A Discontinued models Master station Slave station No 1 Slave station No 2 Slave station No 3 Slave station No 4 Slave station No 5 Slave station No 6 Slave station No 7 D8204 D8205 D8206 D8207 D8208 D8209 D8210 D8212 D8213 D8214 D8215 D8216 D8217 D8218 ...

Page 176: ...he number of slave stations M L R D8175 Refresh range setting status Provided to check the refresh range M L R Devices for communication setting D8176 Corresponding station number settings Provided to set the station number 0 M L R W D8177 Slave station quantity setting Provided to set the number of slave stations used in communication 7 M R W D8178 Refresh range setting Provided to set the refres...

Page 177: ... 232IF H Programming Communication I Remote Maintenance Apx A Discontinued models Master station Slave station No 1 Slave station No 2 Slave station No 3 Slave station No 4 Slave station No 5 Slave station No 6 Slave station No 7 M505 M506 M507 M508 M509 M510 M511 Master station Slave station No 1 Slave station No 2 Slave station No 3 Slave station No 4 Slave station No 5 Slave station No 6 Slave ...

Page 178: ... stations 2 Detailed contents When using ch 2 as the communication port set this device to ON in the sequence program When using ch 1 the sequence program is not required 10 2 3 Serial communication error M8063 and M8438 These devices turn ON when an error is included in the parameters used to set the N N Network M8438 is available in the FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC 1 Stations requiring program sett...

Page 179: ... The device used varies depending on the FX Series 3 Cautions on use Do not set this device to ON using a program or programming tool 10 2 6 Serial communication error code D8063 and D8438 These devices store the serial communication error code D8438 is available in the FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC 1 Stations requiring program setting Setting is required for the master station and slave stations to c...

Page 180: ... the setting status 2 Detailed contents The contents stored in the slave station quantity setting device D8177 in the master station are stored in D8174 3 Cautions on use Do not change a preset numeric value using a program or programming tool 10 2 9 Refresh range setting status D8175 Use this device to check the refresh range set in the master station 1 Stations requiring program setting Setting ...

Page 181: ...mbers in the unused status to enable pattern change in the future Set value Description Set value Description 0 Not applicable 4 Four slave stations are connected 1 One slave station is connected 5 Five slave stations are connected 2 Two slave stations are connected 6 Six slave stations are connected 3 Three slave stations are connected 7 Seven slave stations are connected FX Series Pattern set va...

Page 182: ...n after the specified number of retries the irresponsive station is regarded as having a data transfer sequence error by other stations 10 2 14 Monitoring time setting D8180 Set a vale ranging from 5 to 255 to the special data register D8180 in 10 ms units initial value 5 50 ms 1 Stations requiring program setting The master station requires program setting and slave stations do not require progra...

Page 183: ...ence error count D8203 to D8210 D203 to D210 These devices store the amount of data transfer sequence errors that occurred in the master station and slave stations 1 Stations requiring program setting The master and slave stations require program setting However setting for the station itself is not required 2 Detailed contents The device used varies depending on the FX Series 3 Cautions on use Da...

Page 184: ...or Check point 01H Monitoring timeout L M Slave station did not respond to the sending request from the master station within the monitoring time Wiring and power supply 02H Station number error L M An unexpected slave station responded to the sending request by the master station Station number settings 03H Counter error L M The counter value included in the parameter data is different from the c...

Page 185: ...X3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC 1 Detailed contents These devices store the code of the communication type currently being used in the communication port When communication port ch1 is used D8419 stores the communication type When communication port ch2 is used D8439 stores the communication type The table below shows the contents of the communication type codes Code Description 0 Programming communicati...

Page 186: ...B 68 FX Series PLC User s Manual Data Communication Edition N N Network 10 Related Data 10 2 Details of Related Devices MEMO ...

Page 187: ...al explains parallel link provided for the MELSEC F FX Series Programmable Controllers and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any...

Page 188: ...C 2 FX Series PLC User s Manual Data Communication Edition Parallel Link ...

Page 189: ...y the 485ADPs are used except when the 485BDs are used with FX2 FX FX2C PLCs For selection refer to Chapter 3 Communication equipment operating in accordance with RS 485 Communication equipment operating in accordance with RS 485 FX PLC FX PLC Master station Slave station 500 m 1640 5 50 m 164 0 when 485BD is used 2 units Number of linked units Total extension distance For specifications refer to ...

Page 190: ...ng Chapter 9 Refer to Chapter 8 Outline Refer to Chapter 1 Turn ON power For the programming tool to PLC connection procedure refer to the Programming Communication section in this manual or the respective programming tool manual For details on operating procedures refer to the respective programming tool manual 1 Programming tool Connect PLC 1 Perform PLC communication setting initialization Refe...

Page 191: ...scription of the version check refer to A Common Items Section 4 2 1 3 3 Products whose production was stopped Production was stopped for some models of MELSEC F Series PLCs and programming tools described in this manual For models whose production was stopped refer to Appendix A To see the latest available products refer to the general catalog PLC Applicability applicable version Remarks FX3UC Se...

Page 192: ...ries display units for applicable models and versions supporting the list editor function FX3S PLC GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 E Ver 1 492N or later FX 30P Ver 1 50 or later GOT1000 Series display units Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable models and versions supporting the list editor function FX2N and FX2NC PLCs GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 E Ver 1 08J or later GX Developer SW D5C ...

Page 193: ... Series display units Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable models and versions supporting the list editor function FX3GC PLC GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 J Ver 1 77F or later FX 30P Ver 1 30 or later GOT1000 Series display units Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable models and versions supporting the list editor function FX3S PLC GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 ...

Page 194: ...20P MFXD Ver 5 00 or later FX 10P SET0 Ver 4 00 or later GOT F900 Series display units F940WGOT TWD F940GOT WD F940GOT BD H F940GOT BD RH F940WGOT TWD Ver 1 00 or later F940GOT LWD F940GOT SWD Ver 1 00 or later F940GOT LBD H F940GOT SBD H Ver 1 00 or later F940GOT LBD RH F940GOT SBD RH Ver 1 00 or later GOT1000 Series display units Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable mo...

Page 195: ...n in the table below Specification items such as baud rate cannot be changed Item Specifications Remarks Number of connectable units 2 maximum 1 1 Transmission standard RS 485 or RS 422 standard Maximum total extension distance FX3UC FX3U FX3GC FX3G FX3S FX2NC FX2N FX1NC FX1N FX1S FX0N PLCs 500 m 1640 5 or less 50 m 164 0 or less when 485BD is included in system FX2 FX FX2C PLCs Wire link 10 m 32 ...

Page 196: ...pplicable version High speed parallel link mode applicability applicable version FX3UC Series FX3U Series FX3GC Series FX3G Series FX3S Series FX2NC Series FX2N Series Ver 1 04 or later Ver 1 04 or later FX1NC Series FX1N Series FX1S Series FX0N Series Ver 1 20 or later Ver 1 20 or later FX0S Series FX0 Series FX2C Series Ver 3 07 or later FX2 FX Series Ver 3 07 or later Link mode Time Regular par...

Page 197: ...Word device D Type 50 in each station 10 in each station 0 2 in each station Master station M400 to M449 D230 to D239 D230 D231 Slave station M450 to M499 D240 to D249 D240 D241 M400 to M449 M450 to M499 D230 to D239 D240 to D249 M400 to M449 M450 to M499 D230 to D239 D240 to D249 Automatic update Automatic update M8000 RUN monitor M8070 Master station M8000 RUN monitor M8071 Slave station For the...

Page 198: ...to D499 D500 to D509 Automatic update M8000 RUN monitor M8070 Master station M8000 RUN monitor M8071 Slave station M800 to M899 M900 to M999 D490 to D499 D500 to D509 For the master station set M8070 to ON For the slave station set M8071 to ON Automatic update FX2 FX FX2C FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC FX2 FX FX2C FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC D490 D491 D500 D501 Automat...

Page 199: ...xplains the configuration of communication equipment operating in accordance with RS 485 and the system selection required by FX PLCs 3 1 System Configuration This section outlines the system configuration required to use the parallel link Add optional communication equipment operating in accordance with RS 485 to an FX PLC main unit 3 1 1 Rule for connection When using the parallel link PLCs in t...

Page 200: ...e communication adapter to the left side of the main unit 500 m 1640 5 1 2 Communication equipment operating in accordance with RS 485 FX PLC Important point in selection Total extension distance Communication board Communication board FX3U Series FX3UC 32MT LT 2 FX3U Series FX3UC 32MT LT 2 Communication adapter Expansion board Communication adapter Expansion board For communication equipment comb...

Page 201: ...nstallation area Attach the connector conversion adapter to the main unit and then attach the communication adapter to the left side of the main unit For communication equipment combinations for each FX Series refer to the next section 50 m 164 0 500 m 1640 5 2 1 3 FX3GC Series Attach the communication adapter to the left side of the main unit 500 m 1640 5 Communication adapter Communication equip...

Page 202: ...ication equipment combinations for each FX Series refer to the next section This is the communication board built into the PLC reducing the installation area 50 m 164 0 FX2N Series 3 Communication board Communication equipment operating in accordance with RS 485 FX PLC Important point in selection Special adapter connection board Communication adapter Attach the special adapter connection board to...

Page 203: ...ing the installation area 1 FX1S Series Total extension distance 500 m 1640 5 50 m 164 0 For communication equipment combinations for each FX Series refer to the next section Communication equipment operating in accordance with RS 485 FX PLC Important point in selection Communication adapter Attach the communication adapter to the left side of the main unit 1 FX0N Series Total extension distance 5...

Page 204: ...rent between the units shown in FX3G 485 BD FX3G 485 BD RJ Select either one The parallel link is not provided for the FX1 FX0 and FX0S PLCs FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX0N 500 m 1640 5 FX1S 50 m 164 0 500 m 1640 5 FX1N 50 m 164 0 500 m 1640 5 FX2N 50 m 164 0 500 m 1640 5 FX2NC 485ADP European terminal block FX0N 485ADP Terminal block FX1N 485 BD Europe...

Page 205: ... 14 point 24 point type 50 m 164 0 500 m 1640 5 FX3G 40 point 60 point type When using channel 1 ch 1 The communication equipment works as ch1 when connected to the option connector 1 50 m 164 0 500 m 1640 5 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX3G 485 BD European terminal block FX3G 485 BD RJ RJ45 connector FX3S CNV ADP FX3U 485ADP MB European terminal block FX...

Page 206: ...e when the FX3G 8AV BD FX3G 4EX BD or FX3G 2EYT BD is connected to the option connector 2 500 m 1640 5 FX3U When using channel 1 ch 1 50 m 164 0 500 m 1640 5 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check ch2 ch2 FX3G 485 BD European terminal block FX3G 485 BD RJ RJ45 connector ch2 ch1 European terminal block FX3U 485ADP MB FX3U ADP MB FX3G CNV ADP Where represents 232 and...

Page 207: ...FX3U CF ADP is used it occupies one communication port channel 500 m 1640 5 FX1NC 500 m 1640 5 FX2NC 500 m 1640 5 FX3GC When using channel 1 ch 1 500 m 1640 5 When using channel 2 ch 2 500 m 1640 5 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX3U 485ADP MB European terminal block ch2 FX3U BD Where represents 232 422 485 USB and 8AV ch1 R D S D FX3U CNV BD FX3U 232ADP MB...

Page 208: ...ne communication port channel 500 m 1640 5 When a FX3U CF ADP is used it occupies one communication port channel 500 m 1640 5 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX3U 485ADP MB European terminal block ch1 FX3U 232ADP MB FX3U 485ADP MB FX3U CF ADP ch1 FX3U 485ADP MB European terminal block ch2 ch1 FX3U 485 BD European terminal block RD RD A RD B SD A SD B SG SD F...

Page 209: ...Link E Inverter Communication F Non Protocol Communication RS RS2 Instruction G Non Protocol Communication FX 2N 232IF H Programming Communication I Remote Maintenance Apx A Discontinued models FX2 FX 50 m 164 0 10 m 32 9 FX2C 50 m 164 0 10 m 32 9 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX2 40AP for optical fiber FX2 40AW for wire link FX2 40AP for optical fiber FX2...

Page 210: ... or surge induction are likely to take place As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or high voltage lines 2 Ground the shield wire or shield of the shielded cable at one point on the PLC However do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems Make sure to properly wire the terminal block in accordance with the following precautions Fail...

Page 211: ...One pair wiring Straight type Two pair wiring Cross type Use a cross cable with the following connection 3 Connector RJ45 connector Connector with metal frame is used 2 Cautions on using commercial cables Pay attention to the following point when purchasing commercial cables Use shielded cables Make sure to connect the shield to the metal frame of the connector and perform class D grounding Manufa...

Page 212: ...ble When using a bar terminal with insulating sleeve Because it is difficult to insert a cable into an insulating sleeve depending on the thickness of the cable sheath select the proper cable according to the outline drawing Reference 1 Old model name CRIMPFOX ZA 3 2 Old model name CRIMPFOX UD 6 Cable size when one cable is connected Cable size when two cables are connected Bar terminal with Insul...

Page 213: ...e is 0 5 to 0 8 N m Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above mentioned range Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions When wiring one cable to one terminal When wiring two cables to one terminal 4 2 4 Optical fiber cable Two optical fiber cables are required 1 Cable types 2 Cautions on wiring Separate the optical connector from strong electric cables as m...

Page 214: ...stors Set the terminal resistor selector switch accordingly FX3U 485 BD FX3U 485ADP MB FX3G 485 BD Remove the upper terminal block before changing over the switch in the FX3G 485 BD Removal Loosen the terminal block mounting screws and remove the terminal block Installation Attach the terminal block and tighten the terminal block mounting screws Tightening torque 0 4 to 0 5 N m Do not tighten term...

Page 215: ...sure to perform Class D grounding on the shield of a twisted pair cable connected to the FX3U 485 BD FX3G 485 BD or FX3U 485ADP MB 2 In the case of two pair wiring 4 For cables of FX3G 485 BD RJ refer to Subsection 4 2 2 Make sure to perform class D grounding on the shield of connected cables 5 The FX3U 485 BD FX3G 485 BD FX3G 485 BD RJ and FX3U 485ADP MB have a built in terminal resistor Set the ...

Page 216: ...1N 485 BD or FX2NC 485ADP 2 Make sure to connect the terminal to the grounding terminal in the PLC requiring Class D grounding If the grounding terminal is not provided in the PLC perform Class D grounding directly Wiring circuit switch Class D grounding resistance 100 or less 1 SG FX2NC 485ADP FX2N 485 BD FX1N 485 BD SG Terminal resistor 110 FX0N 485ADP LINK SG FG 2 Terminal resistor 110 FX2N 485...

Page 217: ...ding resistance should be 100 or less Independent grounding should be performed for best results When independent grounding can not be performed perform shared grounding as shown in the following figure For details refer to the Hardware Edition of each series The grounding wire size should be AWG 14 2 mm2 or larger The grounding point should be close to the PLC and all grounding wires should be as...

Page 218: ... communication setting is not provided 2 When the value of D8120 D8400 D8420 is any value other than 0 The communication setting is provided 2 Checking absence presence of parameter setting Check absence presence using the GX Works2 GX Developer FXGP WIN or FX 30P 1 GX Works2 operating procedure For details refer to Section 5 2 2 FXGP WIN operating procedure For details refer to Section 5 3 For de...

Page 219: ... FXGP WIN operating procedure refer to section 5 3 For details on GX Developer operating procedure refer to GX Developer Operating Manual For details on FX 30P operating procedure refer to FX 30P Operation Manual 5 2 1 Operating procedure This subsection explains the serial communication setting method Suppose that GX Works2 is already started up 1 Opening the parameter setting window In the proje...

Page 220: ...FX 30P Operation Manual 5 3 1 Operating procedure This subsection explains the serial communication setting method Suppose that FXGP WIN is already started up 1 Adjusting serial setting parameter Double click Option Serial setting parameter from the toolbar The following dialog box appears according to absence presence of parameter settings 1 When there are no parameter settings The dialog box sho...

Page 221: ...ave station For program examples refer to Section 6 2 2 Transferring the program to each PLC Turn ON the power to each PLC and transfer the program 3 Validating the communication setting When the PLC is in RUN mode set it to STOP mode once and then set it to RUN mode again Or turn OFF the power of the master station and slave station and then turn ON the power to both stations at the same time 4 C...

Page 222: ...w for the master station and slave station 6 2 1 For FX2 FX FX2C FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC FX3G FX3GC FX3U or FX3UC Series 1 Program for communication test for the master station Create the program shown below for the communication test This program is not required during actual operation Set the inputs X000 to X003 to ON or OFF Confirm that the outputs Y000 to Y003 of the slave station turn ON or OFF...

Page 223: ...required during actual operation 6 2 2 For FX0N FX1S or FX3S Series 1 Master station communication test program Create the program shown below for the communication test This program is not required during actual operation 2 Slave station communication test program Create the program shown below for the communication test This program is not required during actual operation M8000 M8071 MOV K500 D8...

Page 224: ...ors in the parallel link These devices are used for judging errors in the parallel link Use them to output link errors to the outside and interlock sequence programs Device Name Description M8070 Parallel link master station declare Set this device to ON when linking a PLC as the master station M8071 Parallel link slave station setting Set this device to ON when linking a PLC as the slave station ...

Page 225: ...lave station to the master station To prevent malfunctions do not change the setting of these devices in the master station The device numbers used and number of devices vary depending on the PLC type For applicable devices refer to the tables below a For FX2 FX FX2C FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC FX3G FX3GC FX3U or FX3UC Series b For FX0N FX1S or FX3S Series Device Number of devices Description Bit device...

Page 226: ...link devices is read to Y000 to Y003 Program for setting the master station Program for indicating link errors Program for writing link devices master station slave station The current value of C0 is written to link devices Program for reading link devices slave station master station The current value of link devices is read to D10 and it is made the setting value of C1 M8178 In the FX3G FX3GC FX...

Page 227: ...or the setting is defective Y10 is set to ON The information on X000 to X003 is written to link devices The information on link devices is read to Y000 to Y003 Program for setting the slave station Program for indicating link errors Program for writing link devices slave station master station The current value of C0 is written to link devices Program for reading link devices master station slave ...

Page 228: ...X3U or FX3UC Series b For FX0N FX1S or FX3S Series Device Name Description M8070 Parallel link master station declare Set this device to ON when linking a PLC as the master station M8071 Parallel link slave station declare Set this device to ON when linking a PLC as the slave station M8162 High speed parallel link mode Set this device to ON when using the high speed parallel link mode M8178 Channe...

Page 229: ...e station to the master station To prevent malfunctions do not change the setting of these devices in the master station The device numbers used and number of devices vary depending on the PLC type For applicable devices refer to the tables below a For FX2 FX FX2C FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC FX3G FX3GC FX3U or FX3UC Series b For FX0N FX1S or FX3S Series Device Number of devices Description Word device D...

Page 230: ...tting the master station Program for indicating link errors Program for writing link devices master station slave station The current value of C0 is written to link devices Program for reading link devices slave station master station The current value of link devices is read to D10 and it is made the setting value of C1 M8162 High speed parallel link mode M8162 is set to ON to set the high speed ...

Page 231: ...nformation on X000 to X003 is written to link devices The information on link devices is read to Y000 to Y003 Program for setting the slave station Program for indicating link errors Program for writing link devices slave station master station The current value of C0 is written to link devices Program for reading link devices master station slave station The current value of link devices is read ...

Page 232: ...hen a link error occurs the link device information remains the same as the status just before the error Create a fail safe program which does not cause abnormality even if a link error occurs 2 Cautions on using FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC PLCs 1 Only ch1 or ch2 can be set in the parallel link 2 Do not use the N N Network and the parallel link at the same time For example it is not allowed to use ch1 f...

Page 233: ...ams examples 8 1 Practical Example 1 Regular Parallel Link Mode When many link devices are required use the regular parallel link mode 8 1 1 System configuration example The example below shows a system configuration in which two FX2N PLCs are linked Link range 100 bit devices and 10 word devices regular parallel link mode Error judgement time 500 ms 8 1 2 Setting contents The program examples sho...

Page 234: ...ster station is moved to D490 of the slave station The ON OFF status of M0 to M7 in the slave station is output to Y000 to Y007 in the master station The value of D10 in the slave station is stored to the timer setting T0 in the master station X010 RUN monitor M8000 M8071 D490 K100 FNC 10 CMP M10 K2M800 K2Y000 FNC 12 MOV RUN monitor M8000 K2M0 K2M900 FNC 12 MOV Y010 The ON OFF status of inputs X00...

Page 235: ... 2 Power supply for FX0N 485ADP The FX0N 485ADP requires a driving power supply Verify that the power supply is correctly provided 3 Wiring Verify that the wiring to all communication equipment is correct If the communication equipment is wired incorrectly communication is not possible For wiring method check refer to Chapter 4 9 4 Checking Sequence Program 1 Communication setting in the sequence ...

Page 236: ...leting these instructions reboot the PLC s power 5 Presence of RS instruction except FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC PLCs Verify that the RS instruction is not used in the program If this instruction is used delete it reboot the PLC s power 6 Presence of RS and RS2 instructions in FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC PLCs Verify that the RS and RS2 instructions are not being used for the same channel If ...

Page 237: ...n the parallel link the serial communication error flag turns ON When ch1 is used M8063 turns ON When ch2 is used in the FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC M8438 turns ON When the serial communication error flag turns ON the error code is stored in D8063 or D8438 2 Checking the error code When a communication error occurs in parallel link using ch 1 the error code is stored in D8063 When a communication er...

Page 238: ...nk setting error Turns ON when an error is included in the setting contents of the master station or slave station M L R M8063 Serial communication error 1 ch 1 Turns ON when an error occurs in serial communication using ch 1 M L R M8438 Serial communication error 2 ch 2 Turns ON when an error occurs in serial communication using ch 2 in the FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC M L R Device number Name Descr...

Page 239: ...tailed contents When using ch 2 as the communication port set this device to ON in the sequence program When using ch 1 the sequence program is not required 10 2 3 Parallel link slave station declare M8071 When this device is set to ON the PLC is handled as the slave station in the started communication 1 Applicable stations The slave station requires program setting 2 Detailed contents In the FX ...

Page 240: ... stations The master and slave station may check parallel link status 2 Detailed contents M8063 turns ON when an error occurs using parallel link on ch 1 When M8063 turns ON the error code is stored in D8063 M8438 turns ON when an error occurs using parallel link on ch 2 When M8438 turns ON the error code is stored in D8438 3 Cautions on use Do not set these devices to ON using a program or progra...

Page 241: ...LCs when the mode is switched from STOP to RUN 10 2 10 Operation mode display D8419 and D8439 These devices store the communication type being used in the FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC 1 Detailed contents These devices store the code of the communication type currently being used in the communication port When communication port ch1 is used D8419 stores the communication type When communication p...

Page 242: ...C 56 FX Series PLC User s Manual Data Communication Edition Parallel Link 10 Related Data 10 2 Details of Related Devices MEMO ...

Page 243: ...al explains computer link provided for the MELSEC F FX Series Programmable Controllers and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any...

Page 244: ...D 2 FX Series PLC User s Manual Data Communication Edition Computer Link ...

Page 245: ...supported computer link protocols units in the A Series PLC But the supported formats and commands are limited For selection refer to Chapter 3 FX 485PC IF Communication equipment operating in accordance with RS 485 Communication equipment operating in accordance with RS 485 Personal computer FX PLC FX PLC Station No 0 00H Station No 15 0FH 500 m 1640 5 50 m 164 0 when 485BD is used 16 units Numbe...

Page 246: ...8 Outline Refer to Chapter 1 Programming tool Connect PLC 1 Perform PLC communication setting Refer to Chapter 5 Commands Refer to Chapter 7 For the programming tool to PLC connection procedure refer to the Programming Communication section in this manual or the respective programming tool manual For details on operating procedures refer to the respective programming tool manual 1 Outline of syste...

Page 247: ...n 4 2 1 3 3 How to look at the manufacturer s serial number The year and month of production of the PLC main unit can be checked on the nameplate and LOT indicated on the front of the product For a detailed description of the How to look at the manufacturer s serial number refer to A Common Items Section 4 1 1 3 4 Products whose production was stopped Production was stopped for some models of MELS...

Page 248: ...Series display units for applicable models and versions supporting the list editor function FX3S PLC GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 E Ver 1 492N or later FX 30P Ver 1 50 or later GOT1000 Series display units Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable models and versions supporting the list editor function FX2N and FX2NC PLCs GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 E Ver 1 08J or later GX Developer SW D5...

Page 249: ... Series display units Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable models and versions supporting the list editor function FX3GC PLC GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 J Ver 1 77F or later FX 30P Ver 1 30 or later GOT1000 Series display units Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable models and versions supporting the list editor function FX3S PLC GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 ...

Page 250: ...20P MFXD Ver 5 00 or later FX 10P SET0 Ver 4 00 or later GOT F900 Series display units F940WGOT TWD F940GOT WD F940GOT BD H F940GOT BD RH F940WGOT TWD Ver 1 00 or later F940GOT LWD F940GOT SWD Ver 1 00 or later F940GOT LBD H F940GOT SBD H Ver 1 00 or later F940GOT LBD RH F940GOT SBD RH Ver 1 00 or later GOT1000 Series display units Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable mo...

Page 251: ...of a programming tool or in a sequence program 1 FX3U and FX3UC Series PLC Ver 2 41 or later and FX3S FX3G FX3GC Series PLC is applicable Item Specifications Remarks Number of connectable units 16 maximum Transmission standard RS 485 or RS 232C standard Maximum total extension distance RS 485 500 m 1640 5 or less 50 m 164 0 or less when 485BD is included in system RS 232C 15 m 49 2 or less Distanc...

Page 252: ...s 10 words 160 points Writes word devices in 1 point units 11 5 64 2 64 2 QW 1 51H 57H Writes bit devices in 16 point units 10 words 160 points Writes word devices in 1 point units 64 2 Test random writing Unit Bit BT 42H 54H Specifies bit devices arbitrarily in 1 point units and sets or resets them 10 20 20 Unit Word WT 57H 54H Specifies bit devices arbitrarily in 16 point units and sets or reset...

Page 253: ...77 X0000 to X0377 Octal X000000 to X000017 X000000 to X000177 X000000 to X000377 Output relay Y Y0000 to Y0015 Y0000 to Y0177 Y0000 to Y0267 Y0000 to Y0177 Y0000 to Y0337 Y0000 to Y0015 Y0000 to Y0177 Y0000 to Y0377 Y000000 to Y000015 Y000000 to Y000177 Y000000 to Y000377 Auxil iary relay M M0000 to M0511 M0000 to M1535 M0000 to M3071 M0000 to M1535 M0000 to M7679 Decimal M000000 to M001535 M00000...

Page 254: ...gisters R cannot access extension file registers ER in a mounted memory cassette In FX3G FX3GC PLCs extension registers R cannot access extension file registers ER Device Device number range character Device number expression Decimal Octal Available commands FX1S FX0N FX2 FX FX2C FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC BR BW BT WR WW WT QR QW QT Timer current value T TN000 to TN063 TN000 ...

Page 255: ... show the data transfer times depending on the number of continuously read or written word devices at the transmission speeds of 9600 bps and 19200 bps when the message waiting time is 0 ms 4 the maximum scan time is 20 ms and the interval time is 100 ms When the transmission speed is 9600 bps Unit sec When the transmission speed is 19200 bps Unit sec When the types of read or written devices incr...

Page 256: ... or RS 232C FX PLC Communication board Communication adapter Special adapter connection board Communication Connector conversion adapter adapter This is the communication board built into the PLC reducing the installation area Important point in selection Attach the special adapter connection board to the main unit and then attach the communication adapter to the left side of the main unit Attach ...

Page 257: ...etween the units shown in FX2NC 485ADP FX0N 485ADP Select either one In the table below only the outside dimensions and D SUB connector shape are different between units shown in FX2NC 232ADP FX0N 232ADP Select either one In the table below only the cable is different between the units shown in FX3G 485 BD FX3G 485 BD RJ Select either one Computer link is not provided for the FX1 FX0 or FX0S PLCs ...

Page 258: ...15 m 49 2 15 m 49 2 FX3G 14 point 24 point type 15 m 49 2 15 m 49 2 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX2N 232 BD 9 pin D Sub male FX2NC 232ADP 9 pin D Sub male FX0N 232ADP 25 pin D Sub female FX2N CNV BD FX2N CNV BD FX3G 232 BD 9 pin D Sub male FX3S CNV ADP FX3U 232ADP MB 9 pin D Sub male 9 pin D Sub male FX3G 232 BD FX3G CNV ADP FX3U 232ADP MB 9 pin D Sub ma...

Page 259: ...point type When using channel 1 ch 1 The communication equipment works as ch1 when connected to the option connector 1 15 m 49 2 15 m 49 2 When using channel 2 ch 2 The communication equipment works as ch2 when connected to the option connector 2 15 m 49 2 Ch2 is not available when the FX3G 8AV BD FX3G 4EX BD or FX3G 2EYT BD is connected to the option connector 2 15 m 49 2 FX Series Communication ...

Page 260: ...cupies one communication port channel 15 m 49 2 FX1NC 15 m 49 2 FX2NC 15 m 49 2 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX3U 232 BD 9 pin D Sub male RD S D ch1 FX3U CNV BD FX3U 232ADP MB 9 pin D Sub male ch1 FX3U 232ADP MB 9 pin D Sub male ch2 R D S D ch1 FX3U BD Where represents 232 422 485 USB and 8AV FX3U CNV BD FX3U 232ADP MB FX3U 485ADP MB FX3U CF ADP ch1 FX3U ...

Page 261: ... Remote Maintenance Apx A Discontinued models FX3GC When using channel 1 ch 1 15 m 49 2 When using channel 2 ch 2 15 m 49 2 FX3UC D DS DSS When using channel 1 ch 1 15 m 49 2 When using channel 2 ch 2 When a FX3U CF ADP is used it occupies one communication port channel 15 m 49 2 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX3U 232ADP MB 9 pin D Sub male ch1 ch1 FX3U 23...

Page 262: ...5 m 49 2 When a FX3U CF ADP is used it occupies one communication port channel 15 m 49 2 FX2 FX 15 m 49 2 FX2C 15 m 49 2 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX3U 232 BD 9 pin D Sub male RD S D ch1 FX3U CNV BD FX3U 232ADP MB 9 pin D Sub male ch1 FX3U 232ADP MB 9 pin D Sub male ch2 R D S D ch1 FX3U BD Where represents 232 422 485 USB and 8AV FX3U CNV BD ch1 FX3U 2...

Page 263: ...r communication in accordance with RS 485 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX0N 500 m 1640 5 FX1S 50 m 164 0 500 m 1640 5 FX1N 50 m 164 0 500 m 1640 5 FX2N 50 m 164 0 500 m 1640 5 FX2NC 485ADP European terminal block FX0N 485ADP Terminal block FX1N 485 BD European terminal block FX1N CNV BD FX2NC 485ADP European terminal block FX0N 485ADP Terminal block FX1N ...

Page 264: ...ation equipment works as ch1 when connected to the option connector 1 50 m 164 0 500 m 1640 5 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX3G 485 BD European terminal block FX3G 485 BD RJ RJ45 connector FX3S CNV ADP FX3U 485ADP MB European terminal block FX3G 485 BD European terminal block FX3G 485 BD RJ RJ45 connector FX3G CNV ADP FX3U 485ADP MB European terminal bloc...

Page 265: ...When using channel 2 ch 2 The communication equipment works as ch2 when connected to the option connector 2 50 m 164 0 Ch2 is not available when the FX3G 8AV BD FX3G 4EX BD or FX3G 2EYT BD is connected to the option connector 2 500 m 1640 5 FX3U When using channel 1 ch 1 50 m 164 0 500 m 1640 5 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX3G 485 BD European terminal bl...

Page 266: ...When using channel 1 ch 1 500 m 1640 5 When using channel 2 ch 2 500 m 1640 5 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX3U 485ADP MB European terminal block ch2 FX3U BD Where represents 232 422 485 USB and 8AV ch1 R D S D FX3U 232ADP MB FX3U 485ADP MB FX3U CF ADP FX3U CNV BD ch1 FX3U 485ADP MB European terminal block ch2 FX2NC 485ADP European terminal block FX0N 485...

Page 267: ...3UC 32MT LT 2 When using channel 1 ch 1 50 m 164 0 500 m 1640 5 When using channel 2 ch 2 When a FX3U 8AV BD is used it occupies one communication port channel 500 m 1640 5 When a FX3U CF ADP is used it occupies one communication port channel 500 m 1640 5 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX3U 485ADP MB European terminal block ch1 FX3U 232ADP MB FX3U 485ADP MB...

Page 268: ...puter Link 3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection 3 2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment FX2 500 m 1640 5 FX2C 500 m 1640 5 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX 485ADP Terminal block FX 485ADP Terminal block ...

Page 269: ... or more away from the main circuit or high voltage lines 2 Ground the shield wire or shield of the shielded cable at one point on the PLC However do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems Make sure to properly wire the terminal block in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions ...

Page 270: ...sistors required for wiring For details refer to Section 4 3 3 Turning OFF the PLC power Before starting any wiring work make sure that the PLC power is OFF 4 Connecting the power supply FX0N 485ADP only Connect the power supply to the 24V DC power terminal 5 Wiring communication equipment Connect communication equipment operating in accordance with RS 485 or RS 232C For communication in accordanc...

Page 271: ...ccordance with RS 485 RS 422 up to 16 PLCs can be connected Make sure that the total extension distance is 500 m 1640 5 or less 50 m 164 0 or less when 485BD is included One pair wiring and two pair wiring are applicable for communication in accordance with RS 485 RS 422 The wiring method is determined for each application Refer to the table below and perform suitable wiring Recommended wiring met...

Page 272: ...etal frame is used 2 Cautions on using commercial cables Pay attention to the following point when purchasing commercial cables Use shielded cables Make sure to connect the shield to the metal frame of the connector and perform class D grounding Manufacturer Model name Remarks Mitsubishi Cable Industries Ltd SPEV SB 0 2 2P Two pair cable of 0 2 mm2 SPEV SB MPC 0 2 3P Three pair cable of 0 2 mm2 SP...

Page 273: ...d cable or solid cable as it is Twist the end of a stranded cable so that wires do not get barbed Do not plate the end of the cable When using a bar terminal with insulating sleeve Because it is difficult to insert a cable into an insulating sleeve depending on the thickness of the cable sheath select the proper cable according to the outline drawing Reference 1 Old model name CRIMPFOX ZA 3 2 Old ...

Page 274: ...erminal block In the FX0N 485ADP and FX 485ADP the terminal screw size is M3 Make sure to use a crimp style terminal with the following sizes Make sure that the tightening torque is 0 5 to 0 8 N m Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above mentioned range Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions When wiring one cable to one terminal When wiring two cables t...

Page 275: ...When using the FX3U 485 BD FX3G 485 BD FX3G 485 BD RJ or FX3U 485ADP MB The FX3U 485 BD FX3G 485 BD FX3G 485 BD RJ and FX3U 485ADP MB have built in terminal resistors Set the terminal resistor selector switch accordingly FX3U 485 BD FX3U 485ADP MB FX3G 485 BD Remove the upper terminal block before changing over the switch in the FX3G 485 BD Removal Loosen the terminal block mounting screws and rem...

Page 276: ...xternal equipment operating in accordance with RS 232C Name When CS and RS are used Name When DR and ER are used 9 pin D Sub 25 pin D Sub 9 pin D Sub 25 pin D Sub FG 1 FG 1 RD RXD 2 3 RD RXD 2 3 SD TXD 3 2 SD TXD 3 2 RS RTS 7 4 ER DTR 4 20 SG GND 5 7 SG GND 5 7 CS CTS 8 5 DR DSR 6 6 FG RD RXD PLC side SD TXD ER DTR SG GND DR DSR Name FX2N 232 BD FX1N 232 BD FX0N 232ADP FX 232ADP 1 2 3 3 2 4 20 5 7...

Page 277: ...minal in the PLC requiring Class D grounding If the grounding terminal is not provided in the PLC perform Class D grounding directly 3 Make sure to provide a terminal resistor at the end of each line The FX3U 485 BD FX3G 485 BD and FX3U 485ADP MB have a built in terminal resistor Set the terminal resistor selector switch accordingly The FX0N 485ADP FX2NC 485ADP FX2N 485 BD and FX1N 485 BD are supp...

Page 278: ...r BMJ 8 BMJ 8 28N No internal connection of the No 2 and 8 pin Do not use a plug with terminal resistor HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO LTD FX3G 485 BD RJ Distributor BMJ 8 Terminal resistor selector switch Open Class D grounding Class D grounding Class D grounding 1 Class D grounding 1 Terminal resistor 110Ω SDA TXD Communication equipment operating in accordance with RS 485 SDB TXD RDA RXD RDB RXD LINK SG 5...

Page 279: ...ss D grounding If the grounding terminal is not provided in the PLC perform Class D grounding directly 3 Make sure to provide a terminal resistor at the end of each line The FX3U 485 BD FX3G 485 BD and FX3U 485ADP MB have a built in terminal resistor Set the terminal resistor selector switch accordingly The FX0N 485ADP FX2NC 485ADP FX2N 485 BD and FX1N 485 BD are supplied together with terminal re...

Page 280: ...28N No internal connection of the No 2 and 8 pin Do not use a plug with terminal resistor HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO LTD RDA RDB SDA SDB SG RDA RDB SDA SDB SG FX3G 485 BD RJ Distributor BMJ 8 Terminal resistor selector switch Open Class D grounding Class D grounding Class D grounding 1 Class D grounding 1 Terminal resistor 330Ω 2 SDA TXD Communication equipment operating in accordance with RS 485 RS 422 ...

Page 281: ...tch to 1 pair 2 pair 4 6 Grounding Grounding should be performed as stated below The grounding resistance should be 100 or less Independent grounding should be performed for best results When independent grounding can not be performed perform shared grounding as shown in the following figure For details refer to the Hardware Edition of each series The grounding wire size should be AWG 14 2 mm2 or ...

Page 282: ...sequence program to a PLC Caution A PLC operates in the same way regardless of the selected method shown above If both methods are selected priority is given to the method using parameters 2 Communication setting method applicability for each FX Series For the detailed contents of special data registers refer to Section 9 2 Setting data write method to special data registers refer to Section 9 3 3...

Page 283: ... as the PLC power is turned ON the setting becomes valid Caution Since the special data registers D8120 D8121 D8129 is a battery backed area in the case of the FX2N FX2NC FX3U and FX3UC series a value cannot be normally saved when the battery is discharge or after a battery error occurs Therefore keep in mind that a computer link setting may not be possible in this case 5 2 Communication Setting U...

Page 284: ...arameters Click the PLC System 2 tab on the dialog box 3 Setting the serial communication parameters Select a channel and check the box labeled Operate Communication Setting box then adjust the parameters for that channel Click End Adjust the settings on the personal computer to match those set here 4 Writing parameters to the PLC Select Online Write to PLC from the menu bar click Parameter Progra...

Page 285: ...GP WIN for Windows and FX 30P handy programming panel This section describes how to change parameters with FXGP WIN Ch2 cannot be set using FXGP WIN For details on GX Works2 operating procedure refer to section 5 2 For details on GX Developer operating procedure refer to GX Developer Operating Manual For details on FX 30P operating procedure refer to FX 30P Operation Manual 5 3 1 Operating procedu...

Page 286: ...FXGP WIN 2 When there are already parameter settings The existing communication setting contents are displayed 2 Adjusting serial setting parameter Execute the communication setting as shown below Adjust the settings on the personal computer to match those set here 3 Writing a sequence program parameters to the PLC Select PLC Transfers Write from the toolbar and click OK button ...

Page 287: ...the computer writes data to the PLC 3 When the PLC sends data to the computer on demand function 1 The OS standing for Operating System indicates the software used to efficiently operate the resources including the CPUs memories terminals files and networks using user programs etc Computer OS 1 Sequence program RS 232C 485PC IF RS 485 Device memory etc 485ADP PLC CPU 2 Command 9 Various data 12 Re...

Page 288: ... When the power is turned ON When regular sending receiving is completed When the control code EOT or CL is received in each format When the control code NAK is sent When the time out time setting is detected For details on the time out time setting refer to Subsection 6 4 4 3 Occurrence of framing error in the computer When a commercial interface in accordance with RS 485 is used in the computer ...

Page 289: ...he computer to the PLC 2 Part B indicates transfer from the PLC to the computer 3 Create a program in the computer so that each data is transferred in turn from the left to the right and that the data is transferred in the order A B as a whole Example In the part A data is transferred in turn from the right starting from ENQ 6 4 Basic Formats of Dedicated Protocol There are two types of control pr...

Page 290: ...um check is executed only to the character areas marked with in the figure above 3 The contents of Character area A Character area B and Character area C vary depending on the contents of transfer but do not vary depending on the control procedure format For details on character contents refer to 7 Commands Computer side PLC side E N Q S T X E T X or or Station No PLC No Command Message wait time ...

Page 291: ...when sum check code not provided is selected 2 When sum check code provided is selected the sum check is executed only to the character areas marked with in the figure above 3 The contents of Character area A Character area B and Character area C vary depending on the contents of transfer but do not vary depending on the control procedure format For details on character contents refer to 7 Command...

Page 292: ... 00H to 0FH For the station number setting method in A Series PLCs refer to the respective A Series PLC manual In FX2 FX FX2C and FX0N PLCs set a value to D8121 For details on the program refer to Section 9 3 Cautions on setting station numbers 1 Do not overlap station numbers If the same number is set for two or more stations the transfer data is destroyed and normal communication is not possible...

Page 293: ...ess executed by the computer to a PLC A command is converted into a two digit ASCII code For an explanation of commands refer to Chapter 7 5 Message waiting time The message waiting time should be specified because some computers require more time before receiving additional data Set the waiting time according to the specifications of each computer Set the waiting time within the range from 0 to 1...

Page 294: ...ated from the received data to check the received data When sum check code not provided is selected the sum check code is not added so the received data is not checked either A calculation example of the sum check code is shown below Example When the station number 0 PLC number FF command BR device memory batch read message waiting time 30 ms and data ABCD are transferred in format 1 the sum check...

Page 295: ...s The setting range is different between the parameter method and the sequence program method 1 Details of setting range When the set value is 0 it is handled as 100 ms 2 Example of setting program When setting the time out time setting to 60 ms For details on the program refer to Section 9 3 2 Caution on programming The time out time setting is not updated until the next character data is receive...

Page 296: ...FX1N FX1NC two scan times E N Q Computer Interface PLC A C K S T X Waiting time TW T3 T4 T5 It should be the interval times in the following table or more Re ad in g pr oc es sin g This time is 0 when the message waiting time is not set or when the waiting time is shorter than the communication time with the CPU T0 T1 T2 Sequence program END Step 0 END Step 0 END Step 0 END The PLC watches the tim...

Page 297: ...n RUN mode reading requires up to one scan time depending on the sending timing Reading requires about 1 ms while the PLC is in STOP mode T2 END processing time in the PLC executing data transfer T4 Scan time or longer In the case of wiring in the 1 to N configuration T4 should be longer than the time out time setting D8129 extended by one scan time TW Message waiting time 2 When the computer writ...

Page 298: ... status Example When indicating the ON OFF status of five devices starting from M10 2 In 1 word 16 point units When the bit device memory is handled in 1 word 16 point units one word is expressed in 4 bit units in turn from the most significant bit in hexadecimal Example When indicating the ON OFF status of 32 devices starting from M16 4DH 30H 31H 30H 30H 35H 30H Head device M 0 0 1 0 Number of de...

Page 299: ...ntents stored in the 32 bit counter C200 1 1 For indicating the current value of C200 use CN200 44H 30H 35H 33H 30H 32H 30H Head device D 0 3 5 0 Number of devices 0 2 Data 5 6 A B 35H 42H 41H 36H Data 1 7 0 F 31H 46H 30H 37H 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 b15 b11 b12 b13 b14 b9 b10 b8 b5 b6 b7 b4 b1 b2 b3 b15 b11 b12 b13 b14 b9 b10 b8 b5 b6 b7 b4 b1 b2 b3 b0 b0 5 6 F 0 ...

Page 300: ...s bit devices in 16 point units or word devices in 1 point units 7 5 QW Writes bit devices in 16 point units or word devices in 1 point units 7 6 BT Specifies bit devices arbitrarily in 1 point units and sets or resets them forcibly sets them to ON or OFF 7 7 WT Specifies bit devices arbitrarily in 16 point units and sets or resets them forcibly sets them to ON or OFF Or specifies word devices arb...

Page 301: ... X044 in the PLC whose station number is 5 while the message waiting time is set to 100 ms When X040 and X043 are OFF and X041 X042 and X044 are ON Point The message wait time is specified in 10 ms units within the range from 0 to 150 ms and expressed in hexadecimal within the range from 0 to FH For example 100 ms is expressed as A BR S T X Station No PLC No E T X Character area B Batch read comma...

Page 302: ...nd FX1S Series 2 Specification examples Example 1 When reading the contents of thirty two devices from X040 to X077 in the PLC whose station number is 5 while the message waiting time is set to 0 ms E N Q PLC No WR S T X E T X A C K Character area B Batch read command unit word One device uses 4 characters Four digits hexadecimal express one word data Computer side PLC side Head device 5 character...

Page 303: ...02 One point specifies 16 devices Example 2 When reading the present value of two devices from T123 and T124 in the PLC whose station number is 5 while the message waiting time is set to 0 ms A C K 0 5 F F E T X B 3 S T X 0 5 F F 7 B C 9 1 2 3 4 0 2 6 4 E N Q 0 5 F F W R 0 This range is regarded as the sum check target This range is regarded as the sum check target 35H 30H 46H 46H 52H 57H 30H 54H ...

Page 304: ...m check code in hexadecimal 2 Specification examples For FX3U and FX3UC PLCs Example 1 When reading the contents of thirty two devices from X040 to X077 in the PLC whose station number is 5 while the message waiting time is set to 0 ms Computer side PLC side E N Q S T X E T X QR Head device 7 characters Data on specified number of device points A C K Character area A One device uses 4 characters F...

Page 305: ...rom R30000 to R30001 in the PLC whose station number is 5 while the message waiting time is set to 0 ms A C K 0 5 F F E T X B 3 S T X 0 5 F F 7 B C 9 1 2 3 4 0 2 9 B E N Q 0 5 F F Q R 0 This range is regarded as the sum check target This range is regarded as the sum check target 35H 30H 46H 46H 52H 51H 30H 52H 30H 30H 33H 30H 32H 30H 42H 39H 05H 35H 30H 46H 46H 02H 33H 42H 03H 35H 30H 46H 46H 06H ...

Page 306: ...ries 2 Specification example When writing data to five devices from M903 to M907 in the PLC whose station number is 0 while the message waiting time is set to 0 ms E N Q BW A C K Batch write command unit bit Character area A 0 30H indicates the OFF status 1 31H indicates the ON status Computer side PLC side Head device 5 characters Written device range specification Number of device points 2 chara...

Page 307: ...er of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal 1 Up to 11 device points in the FX0N and FX1S Series 2 Up to 5 device points in the FX0N and FX1S Series 2 Specification examples Example 1 When writing data to thirty two devices from M640 to M671 in the PLC whose station number is 0 while the message waiting time is set to 0 ms Point The WW command handles data in 1 word units When writing da...

Page 308: ...sage waiting time is set to 0 ms A C K 0 0 F F 0 2 1 2 3 4 A C D 7 F 9 E N Q 0 0 F F W W 0 This range is regarded as the sum check target 30H 46H 46H 57H 57H 44H 32H 05H 30H 30H 46H 46H 06H 31H 34H 33H 32H 41H 37H 44H 43H 39H 46H Indicates that 1234H hexadecimal which is 4660 in decimal is written to D0 Indicates that ACD7H hexadecimal which is 21289 in decimal is written to D1 Computer side PLC s...

Page 309: ... number When 32 bit devices CN00200 to CN00255 are written one device point is handled as two word data Accordingly up to 32 device points can be specified 2 Express the station number PLC number number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal 2 Specification examples For FX3U and FX3UC PLCs Example 1 When writing data to thirty two devices from M640 to M671 in the PLC whose station numb...

Page 310: ... waiting time is set to 0 ms A C K 0 5 F F 0 2 5 F E N Q 0 5 F F Q W 0 This range is regarded as the sum check target 35H 30H 46H 46H 57H 51H 30H 52H 33H 32H 46H 35H 05H 35H 30H 46H 46H 06H Computer side PLC side R 0 3 0 0 0 0 37H 31H 39H 43H 42H 7 B C 9 1 32H 2 33H 3 4 34H Indicates that 7BC9H hexadecimal which is 31689 in decimal is written to R30000 Indicates that 1234H hexadecimal which is 466...

Page 311: ...g conditions 1 Number of device points 20 1 2 Express the station number PLC number number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal 1 10 in the FX0N and FX1S Series 2 Specification example When writing data for setting M50 to ON S100 to OFF and Y001 to ON in the PLC whose station number is 5 while the message waiting time is set to 0 ms E N Q B T Test write arbitrarily command unit bit C...

Page 312: ...hod in the control procedure format 1 is shown below 1 Specify the device point range while satisfying the following conditions 1 Number of device points 10 1 in unit of 10 1 in case of bit devices One unit indicates 16 points 2 Express the station number PLC number number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal 3 The WT command cannot handle 32 bit word devices C200 to C255 CN200 to CN...

Page 313: ...essage waiting time is set to 0 ms B C A 9 D 0 5 0 0 1 2 3 4 Y 0 1 0 0 E N Q 0 5 F F W T 0 0 3 35H 30H 46H 46H 54H 57H 30H 33H 05H 44H 30H 35H 30H 30H 31H 32H 34H 33H This range is regarded as the sum check target 59H 30H 31H 30H 30H 42H 43H 39H 41H Indicates that 1234H which is 4660 in decimal is written to D500 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 B C 9 A Y 1 0 6 Y 1 0 7 Y 1 1 0 Y 1 1 1 Y 1 1 2 Y 1 1...

Page 314: ...LC number number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal 3 Word devices and bit devices in 16 point units can be specified together 4 The QT command cannot handle 32 bit word devices C200 to C255 CN00200 to CN00255 2 Specification example When writing data for setting the current value of R12000 to 1234H and Y100 to Y117 to BCA9H in the PLC whose station number is 5 while the message wa...

Page 315: ...the PLC status does not change and the PLC returns the remote error code 18H to the computer Remote STOP mode control When the RS command which sets remote STOP mode in control is executed in the computer the PLC executes the following processing If the RS command is executed while the PLC is in STOP mode the PLC status does not change and the PLC returns the remote error code 18H to the computer ...

Page 316: ... 1 When remotely setting the PLC whose station number is 5 to RUN mode while the message waiting time is set to 0 ms Example 2 When remotely setting the PLC whose station number is 0 to STOP mode while the message waiting time is set to 0 ms E N Q RR or RS RR command to remotely set the PLC to the RUN mode RS command to remotely set the PLC to the STOP mode Computer side PLC side A C K PLC No Stat...

Page 317: ...The specification method for control procedure format 1 is shown below Express the station number PLC number number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal respectively PLC model name CPU Model name code hexadecimal PLC model name CPU Model name code hexadecimal FX2 FX FX2C 8DH A2CCPU 9AH FX0N 8EH A2USCPU 82H FX1S F2H A2CPU S1 A2USCPU S1 83H FX1N FX1NC 9EH A3CPU A3NCPU A3H FX2N FX2NC 9D...

Page 318: ... the message waiting time is set to 0 ms A C K 0 F F F S T X 0 F F F E T X 8 1 8 D E N Q 0 F F F P C 0 C 5 46H 30H 46H 46H 43H 50H 30H 35H 43H 05H 46H 30H 46H 46H 02H 31H 38H 03H 46H 30H 46H 46H 06H The example above indicates that the model name of the target PLC is the FX2 FX or FX2C Series 44H 38H Computer side PLC side This range is regarded as the sum check target This range is regarded as th...

Page 319: ...tation with the specified station number In this function PLCs do not give any response to the GW command from the computer When the PLC power is turned OFF or when the PLC is set to STOP mode the special auxiliary relay M8126 or M8426 is set to OFF and the processing request in the global function is cleared 7 12 2 Global function control procedure specification method and specification example T...

Page 320: ... PLCs except FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC PLCs and when ch1 is used in FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC PLCs 1 FX0N FX1S FX1N and FX1NC PLCs do not support this device Device Name Description M8127 1 On demand send processing Remains ON while the on demand function is being executed ON On demand data is being sent OFF Sending of on demand data is completed M8128 On demand error flag Turns ON when an error i...

Page 321: ...te When the specified unit is a word The amount of on demand data is equivalent to the number of data registers to be sent When the specified unit is a byte Two on demand data units use one data register for sending Example When the amount of on demand data is 5 the number of data registers for sending is 3 Device Name Description M8427 On demand send processing Remains ON while the on demand func...

Page 322: ... D8127 D8427 D8128 D8428 Checks unit word or byte of data to be sent Sending of on demand data Writes data to be sent to data registers Resets on demand error Starts on demand function Checks for sending error Sending is completed It is checked whether M8129 is ON or OFF ON Unit byte 8 bit OFF Unit word 16 bit Data to be sent is written to data registers The on demand error flag M8128 turns OFF Wh...

Page 323: ...uter is receiving data 1 As soon as an on demand request is given the on demand send processing signal M8127 turns ON 2 After the sending of response data STX to the command data ENQ from the computer is completed the PLC sends on demand data 3 After the receiving of on demand data is complete the computer sends response data ACK to the sending of the response data STX from the PLC Judges whether ...

Page 324: ...umber PLC number number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal IMPORTANT Do not use the on demand function when the system configuration is not 1 to 1 type If the on demand function is used in the multi drop link system in which the computer and PLC CPUs have the 1 to N configuration the transfer data and on demand send data in the control procedure format 1 or 4 are destroyed and norm...

Page 325: ... F E 32H 31H 1 2 3 4 33H 35H 34H 02H E T X 32H 39H 9 2 03H The PLC number FE is automatically added by the PLC 36H 37H 38H 5 6 7 8 Data is sent in 4 bit units starting from highest order bits D8127 D8128 100 2 On demand command 1 2 M8128 M8129 ON OFF OFF D100 D101 1234H 5678H Computer side PLC side X000 M8000 M8002 PLS M0 M0 M8127 H1234 D100 MOV H5678 D101 MOV RST M8128 RST Y000 RST Y001 K100 D812...

Page 326: ...a is sent in 4 bit units in the order lowest order 8 bit highest order 8 bit D8127 D8128 100 4 On demand command 1 2 M8128 M8129 ON OFF ON D100 D101 1234H 5678H Computer side PLC side X000 M8000 M8002 PLS M0 M0 M8127 H1234 D100 MOV H5678 D101 MOV RST M8128 RST Y000 RST Y001 K100 D8127 MOV K4 D8128 MOV SET Y000 SET Y001 END The data unit is set to byte value The startup command is the pulse operati...

Page 327: ...he following condition 1 Character length 254 2 Express the station number PLC number number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal respectively 2 Specification example When executing the loop back test to the PLC whose station number is 0 using the data ABCDE while the message waiting time is set to 0 ms E N Q T T S T X E T X Character area B Loop back test command Data Data for chara...

Page 328: ... equipment is correct If the communication equipment is wired incorrectly communication is not possible For wiring method check refer to Chapter 4 8 4 Checking Sequence Program 1 Communication setting in the sequence program Verify that the parallel link and N N Network are not set Verify that the communication format D8120 D8400 and D8420 is set correctly Communication is not possible if a commun...

Page 329: ...er deleting these instructions reboot the PLC s power 5 Presence of RS instruction except FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC PLCs Verify that the RS instruction is not used in the program If this instruction is used delete it reboot the PLC s power 6 Presence of RS and RS2 instructions in FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC PLCs Verify that the RS and RS2 instructions are not being used for the same channe...

Page 330: ...nd then execute communication again 2 Refer to the command list shown in Chapter 7 modify the specified command etc and then execute communication again 06H Character area error An error occurred in the character area A B or C Or a specified command does not exist 1 The control procedure set using parameters is different 2 A specified device number does not exist in the target PLC 3 A device numbe...

Page 331: ...on Serial communication errors are cleared in other PLCs when the mode is switched from STOP to RUN Device Error code Error item Contents of error Action D8063 ch1 6301 Parity overrun or framing error The transfer data is abnormal Check the transfer specifications set using parameters and execute communication again 6305 Command error When the station number was FF any command other than GW was re...

Page 332: ...rror flag Turns ON when an error is included in a specified value for data sending used in the on demand function for ch 1 R M8129 On demand data byte word switch Specifies the unit byte or word of data handled in the on demand function for ch 1 ON Unit Byte 8 bit OFF Unit Word 16 bit R W M8426 Global function ON Turns ON or OFF when the global command GW is received from the computer for ch 2 R M...

Page 333: ...ntity specification Sets the amount of data to be sent using the on demand function for ch 1 R W D8129 Time out time setting Sets the evaluation time for error when the receiving of data from the computer is interrupted for ch 1 R W D8419 Operation mode display ch 1 Stores the communication type being used for ch 1 R D8420 Communication format setting Sets the communication format for ch 2 R W D84...

Page 334: ...that the communication format setting and station number settings are kept 2 Cautions on use In an FX0N PLC the communication setting status is kept only when M8120 is set to ON In any PLC other than FX0N PLCs setting of M8120 is not required 9 2 3 Global function ON M8126 and M8426 These devices turn ON OFF when the PLC receives the global command GW from personal computers 1 Detailed contents Wh...

Page 335: ...on port ch1 use M8129 In FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch2 use M8429 2 Cautions on use When the unit is set to word the amount of on demand data units is equivalent to the number of data registers for sending When the unit is set to byte two on demand data units use one data register for sending Example When the amount of on demand data is 5 the amount of data registe...

Page 336: ... program and then turn ON the power In all PLCs except FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using communication port ch1 use D8120 Set the communication format using parameters when using the communication port ch2 in FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC PLCs Use D8420 for confirmation The tables below show the setting details Contents of D8120 1 This setting is available only in FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC PLC...

Page 337: ...ge is from 0 to 15 from H00 to H0F In FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC PLCs the contents set using parameters are stored when the power is turned ON In FX2 FX FX2C and FX0N PLCs set the station number using a sequence program and then turn ON the power In all PLCs except FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC PLCs and in FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using communication port ch1 use D...

Page 338: ...tting the on demand data head device number specification device D8127 or D8427 set the flag using the pulse operation type While the on demand send processing flag M8127 or M8427 is ON do not write data 9 2 11 On demand data quantity specification D8128 and D8428 These devices set the amount of data to be sent from a PLC using the on demand function in a sequence program 1 Detailed contents These...

Page 339: ...The priority is given to the parameter setting When setting the time out time setting device D8129 in an FX0N PLC set the communication setting latched battery backed device M8120 to ON Make sure that the time out time setting is not shorter than the time required to receive one character at the set baud rate 9 2 13 Operation mode display D8419 and D8439 These devices store the communication type ...

Page 340: ...he PLC 3 Setting the PLC mode to RUN Set the PLC to RUN mode and execute the program 4 Turning the PLC power OFF and then ON Turn OFF the PLC power and then turn it to ON so that the communication setting becomes valid 9 3 2 Caution on communication setting using sequence program 1 Do not set the communication using a sequence program and parameters at the same time If the communication is set usi...

Page 341: ...k E Inverter Communication F Non Protocol Communication RS RS2 Instruction G Non Protocol Communication FX 2N 232IF H Programming Communication I Remote Maintenance Apx A Discontinued models 9 4 ASCII Code Table ASCII code table 8 bit code expressed in hexadecimal The ASCII codes A1H to DFH indicate Japanese characters 1 ASCII CODE 5C symbol is displayed as in Japanese ...

Page 342: ...D 100 FX Series PLC User s Manual Data Communication Edition Computer Link 9 Related Data 9 4 ASCII Code Table MEMO ...

Page 343: ... manual explains inverter communication provided for the MELSEC F FX Series Programmable Controllers and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION This manual confers no industrial property rights or any...

Page 344: ...E 2 FX Series PLC User s Manual Data Communication Edition Inverter Communication ...

Page 345: ...communication function Series inverters 2 Inverter operations can be monitored various command can be given to inverters and parameters can be read or written in inverters 3 The total extension distance is 500m 1640 5 maximum for the system configured with 485ADP only Point Inverter operations reading writing parameters and monitor output can be performed with the PLC function by writing a prepare...

Page 346: ...cables and connection equipment Wiring example Outline of system Available PLC versions Available programming tools Refer to Chapter 1 Perform PLC communication setting Refer to Chapter 6 Refer to Chapter 4 Refer to Chapter 5 Program examples for FX2N FX2NC Series Chapter 8 Basic programs Program examples for FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Series Chapter 10 Basic programs Practical program examples Ch...

Page 347: ...n of the How to look at the manufacturer s serial number refer to A Common Items Section 4 1 PLC Applicability Remarks FX3UC Series 1 F800 A800 F700 A700 E700 D700 V500 F500 A500 E500 and S500 Series inverters can be connected FX3U Series 1 FX3GC Series 1 FX3G Series 1 FX3S Series 1 FX2NC Series 1 A500 E500 and S500 Series inverters can be connected FX2N Series 1 FX1NC Series Inverter communicatio...

Page 348: ... for applicable models and versions supporting the list editor function FX3GC PLC GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 E Ver 1 77F or later FX 30P Ver 1 30 or later The IVMC instruction is supported in Ver 1 50 or later GOT1000 Series display units Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable models and versions supporting the list editor function FX3S PLC GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 E Ver 1 492N or...

Page 349: ...supported in Ver 1 56J or later GX Developer SW D5C F GPPW J Ver 8 72A or later The IVMC instruction is not supported FX 30P Ver 1 00 or later The IVMC instruction is supported in Ver 1 50 or later GOT1000 Series display units Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable models and versions supporting the list editor function FX3GC PLC GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 J Ver 1 77F or later ...

Page 350: ... communication equipment type Protocol type Inverter computer link Link startup mode Control procedure Asynchronous system Communication method Half duplex bidirectional communication Baud rate 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 1 bps Any one can be selected ASCII Character format Start bit Data bit 7 bit Parity bit Even Stop bit 1 bit Series Built in PU connector FR A5NR option Remarks FREQROL S500 Only mo...

Page 351: ...mal Read contents Applicable inverter F800 A800 F700 A700 E700 D700 V500 F500 A500 E500 S500 H7B Operation mode H6F Output frequency number of rotations H70 Output current H71 Output voltage H72 Special monitor H73 Special monitor selection number H74 Alarm definition H75 Alarm definition H76 Alarm definition H77 Alarm definition H79 Inverter status monitor extended H7A Inverter status monitor H6E...

Page 352: ...inverter communication instruction as shown in the figure below 1 The time required for the n th time sending receiving in a single instruction X0 M0 M8029 SET M0 Inverter communication instruction RST M0 M0 M8029 T2 Tinv T7 n 1 T8 n 1 T6 n 1 T9 n 1 T3 T1 T4 T5 Communication preparation processing Inverter waiting time The request message is being sent Inverter data check time The response message...

Page 353: ...xecute several times of sending receiving in a single instruction The following table shows the number of times of sending receiving in each communication instruction 2 For parameters requiring change of the 2nd parameter refer to section 9 10 Inverter communication instruction Number of times of sending receiving in per instruction IVDR 1 IVCK 1 IVRD Change of the 2nd parameter is unnecessary 2 C...

Page 354: ...th Parity bit Stop bit 10 bit 2 Execution times in inverter communication instructions Execution times in inverter communication instructions is as shown in the following calculation expression Name Set value bit Start bit 1 Data length 7 7 Parity bit Even number 1 Stop bit 1 1 Total 10 Communication time Calculation method T4 T5 1 ms T6 n For Scan time T7 n T8 n T9 n For Scan time T7 n T8 n T9 n ...

Page 355: ...last 2nd or 3rd sending receiving in the IVWR and IVRD instructions and the data check time for the last sending receiving of each parameter writing in the IVBWR instruction correspond to parameter reading writing 30 ms The data check time for sending and receiving expansion parameter change and 2nd parameter change other than the above correspond to various monitors 12 ms Inverter communication i...

Page 356: ...NT 1 10 50 ms 10 40 4 19200 1 T5 1 ms Tinv T1 T2 T3 1 112 1 114 ms T7 1 T9 1 11 4 10 1000 7 8 ms T7 1 T8 1 T9 1 7 8 12 19 8 ms T8 1 12 ms 19200 1 T7 2 T9 2 9 11 10 1000 10 4 ms T7 2 T8 2 T9 2 10 4 30 40 4 ms T8 2 30 ms T4 INT 1 10 20 ms T2 2 T4 T5 T6 1 T6 2 2 20 1 20 50 112 ms Sending and receiving frequency The first sending and receiving The second sending and receiving 10 15 10 T7 1 T8 1 T9 1 1...

Page 357: ...itten by the IVBWR instruction Tinv T1 T2 T3 512 ms T1 1 ms T3 1 ms Calculate T2 as follows because Pr 10 to Pr 14 do not require change of the 2nd parameter and the time required for writing is same in each parameter S2 10 T7 1 T8 1 T9 1 10 T7 2 T8 2 T9 2 T6 1 INT 1 10 INT 1 10 20 ms 10 19 8 19200 1 T7 1 T9 1 11 4 10 1000 7 8 ms T7 1 T8 1 T9 1 7 8 12 19 8 ms T8 1 12 ms T6 2 INT 1 10 INT 1 10 40 m...

Page 358: ... the communication board built into the PLC reducing the installation area Attach the special adapter connection board to the main unit and then attach the communication adapter to the left side of the main unit 50 m 164 0 500 m 1640 5 1 2 Communication adapter Attach the communication adapter to the left side of the main unit 3 500 m 1640 5 Function extension memory cassette only for FX2N PLC Fun...

Page 359: ...Important point in selection Total extension distance Attach the expansion board to the main unit and then attach the communication adapter to the left side of the main unit 500 m 1640 5 50 m 164 0 500 m 1640 5 Expansion board FX3UC 32MT LT 2 Communication adapter Expansion board Communication adapter 6 7 8 FX3GC FX3UC D DS DSS FX3S FX3G PLC FX3S FX3G PLC Communication Communication board adapter ...

Page 360: ...nt between the units shown in FX3G 485 BD FX3G 485 BD RJ Select either one Inverter communication is not provided for the FX1 FX2 FX FX2C FX0 FX0S FX0N FX1S FX1N and FX1NC PLCs FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check 50 m 164 0 500 m 1640 5 FX3S 50 m 164 0 500 m 1640 5 FX3G 14 point 24 point type 50 m 164 0 500 m 1640 5 FX2N ROM E1 Function extension memory cassette...

Page 361: ...ication equipment works as ch1 when connected to the option connector 1 50 m 164 0 500 m 1640 5 When using channel 2 ch 2 The communication equipment works as ch2 when connected to the option connector 2 50 m 164 0 Ch2 is not available when the FX3G 8AV BD FX3G 4EX BD or FX3G 2EYT BD is connected to the option connector 2 500 m 1640 5 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distan...

Page 362: ... one communication port channel 500 m 1640 5 500 m 1640 5 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check ch1 FX3U 485 BD European terminal block RD RD A RD B SD A SD B SG SD FX3U CNV BD FX3U 485ADP MB European terminal block ch1 FX3U 485ADP MB European terminal block ch2 FX3U BD Where represents 232 422 485 USB and 8AV ch1 R D S D FX3U 232ADP MB FX3U 485ADP MB FX3U CF ADP ...

Page 363: ... Discontinued models FX3GC When using channel 1 ch 1 500 m 1640 5 When using channel 2 ch 2 500 m 1640 5 FX3UC D DS DSS When using channel 1 ch 1 500 m 1640 5 When using channel 2 ch 2 When a FX3U CF ADP is used it occupies one communication port channel 500 m 1640 5 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check ch1 FX3U 485ADP MB European terminal block ch1 ch2 FX3U 485A...

Page 364: ...ation port channel 500 m 1640 5 When a FX3U CF ADP is used it occupies one communication port channel 500 m 1640 5 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check ch1 FX3U 485 BD European terminal block RD RD A RD B SD A SD B SG SD FX3U CNV BD FX3U 485ADP MB European terminal block ch1 FX3U 485ADP MB European terminal block ch2 FX3U BD Where represents 232 422 485 USB and 8...

Page 365: ...3 94 or more away from the main circuit or high voltage lines 2 Ground the shield wire or shield of the shielded cable at one point on the PLC However do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems Make sure to properly wire the terminal block in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfuncti...

Page 366: ...C power Before starting any wiring work make sure that the PLC power is OFF 4 Connecting the power supply FX0N 485ADP only Connect the power supply to the 24V DC power terminal 5 Wiring communication equipment Connect communication equipment with communication port of inverters PU port built in terminal for RS 485 FR A5NR FR 7TR For details refer to Section 4 8 6 Connecting terminal resistors Conn...

Page 367: ...he case of 1 to N connection 1 When using FX3G 485 BD RJ use the PU connector RJ45 connector for connection PU connector RJ45 connector Non stranded cable 10BASE T cable for LAN Terminal resistor Which is supplied with or built in the communication equipment for the FX PLC side and should be arranged by the user for the inverter side 10BASE T cable Terminal resistor RS 485 connector PU connector W...

Page 368: ...500 F500 and V500 Series FR A5NR 1 In the case of 1 to 1 connection 2 In the case of 1 to N connection Twisted pair cable Terminal resistor FR A5NR When a distributor is not used Terminal resistor Twisted pair cable Terminal resistor FR A5NR FR A5NR FR A5NR When a distributor is not used Twisted pair cable Twisted pair cable Terminal resistor ...

Page 369: ... 232IF H Programming Communication I Remote Maintenance Apx A Discontinued models 4 2 3 F800 A800 F700 and A700 Series built in RS 485 terminal 1 In the case of 1 to 1 connection Set the terminal resistor switch in the inverter to 100 2 In the case of 1 to N connection Set the terminal resistor switch in the last inverter to 100 Twisted pair cable Built in RS 485 terminal Twisted pair cable Twiste...

Page 370: ...onnection Devices 4 2 4 E700 Series FR E7TR 1 In the case of 1 to 1 connection 2 In the case of 1 to N connection When a distributor is not used Terminal resistor Twisted pair cable FR E7TR FR E7TR FR E7TR FR E7TR When a distributor is not used Terminal resistor Twisted pair cable Twisted pair cable Twisted pair cable ...

Page 371: ... point when purchasing commercial cables 5V DC is output to the PU connector in the inverters for supplying power to the PU It is necessary to cut pins No 2 and 8 of commercial cables to prevent wiring to pins No 2 and 8 It is recommended to use the distributor BMJ 8 28N 4 3 2 Twisted pair cable recommended The table below shows recommended model names and manufacturers of cables used in wiring Us...

Page 372: ...le When using a bar terminal with insulating sleeve Because it is difficult to insert a cable into an insulating sleeve depending on the thickness of the cable sheath select the proper cable according to the outline drawing Reference 1 Old model name CRIMPFOX ZA 3 2 Old model name CRIMPFOX UD 6 Cable size when one cable is connected Cable size when two cables are connected Bar terminal with Insula...

Page 373: ...P the terminal screw size is M3 Make sure to use a crimp style terminal with the following sizes Make sure that the tightening torque is 0 5 to 0 8 N m Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above mentioned range Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions When wiring one cable to one terminal When wiring two cables to one terminal 4 4 Connection Devices RJ45 Co...

Page 374: ...A and RDB terminals of the communication equipment 3 When using the FX3U 485 BD FX3G 485 BD FX3G 485 BD RJ or FX3U 485ADP MB The FX3G 485 BD FX3U 485 BD FX3G 485 BD RJ and FX3U 485ADP MB have built in terminal resistors Set the terminal resistor selector switch accordingly FX3U 485 BD FX3U 485ADP MB FX3G 485 BD Remove the upper terminal block before changing over the switch in the FX3G 485 BD Remo...

Page 375: ... When the FR A5NR is used in connection Connect a terminal resistor chip which is supplied together with the FR A5NR between the RDB and RDR terminals in the most distant inverter 3 When the FR E7TR is used in connection A terminal resistor is built into the FR E7TR Set the terminal resistor switch in the E700 Series inverter located at the end to 100 4 When the inverter built in RS 485 terminal i...

Page 376: ...inverter For details refer to the instruction manual of the FR A5NR 3 In the case of computer link using the FR E7TR Attach the FR E7TR to an E700 Series inverter For details refer to the instruction manual of the FR E7TR Pin No Signal name Remarks 8 P5S Not used 7 SG 6 RDB 5 SDA 4 SDB 3 RDA 2 P5S Not used 1 SG 8 1 When seen from inverter front receptacle side Modular jack Terminal block Screw siz...

Page 377: ...ruction G Non Protocol Communication FX 2N 232IF H Programming Communication I Remote Maintenance Apx A Discontinued models 4 In the case of built in RS 485 terminal F800 A800 F700 and A700 Series inverters are equipped with a built in RS 485 terminal For details refer to the instruction respective inverter manual Connect them to the communication equipment operating in accordance with RS 485 of t...

Page 378: ... SG 24 24G RDA RDB SDA SDB SG FX0N 485ADP FX2NC 485ADP 54361 Connect a terminal resistor of 100 1 2 W not supplied 10BASE T cable FG Class D grounding Inverter R D B R D A S D A S D B S G PU RS 485 connector 54361 5 4 3 6 1 5 4 3 6 1 8 1 Modular jack When seen from inverter front receptacle side FX2N 485 BD FX3G 485 BD FX3U 485 BD FX3U 485ADP MB FX3G 485 BD RJ PU RJ45 connector Distributor BMJ 8 2...

Page 379: ...G PU RS 485 connector 54361 Distributor 54361 5 4 3 6 1 5 4 3 6 1 For the pin arrangement in the connector refer to the connection diagram for one inverter FX2NC 485ADP FX3G 485 BD FX3U 485 BD Terminal resistor 110 FX3U 485 BD FX3G 485 BD and FX3U 485ADP MB Set the built in selector switch FX2N 485 BD and FX2NC 485ADP Connect a terminal resistor supplied between the RDA and RDB terminals FX3U 485A...

Page 380: ...tor switch FX2N 485 BD and FX2NC 485ADP Connect a terminal resistor supplied between the RDA and RDB terminals SDB SDA RDA RDB RDR SG A B C 0 3mm2 or more Twisted pair cable 0 3mm2 or more R D B R D A S D A S D B S G FR A5NR R D R Inverter R D B R D A S D A S D B S G FR A5NR R D R R D B R D A S D A S D B S G FR A5NR R D R Connect the terminal resistor connection piece to the inverter located furth...

Page 381: ...e type FX3G 485 BD RJ PLC Inverter PU RS 485 connector 10BASE T cable Modular jack When seen from inverter front receptacle side Terminal resistor 110 FX3U 485 BD FX3G 485 BD FX3U 485ADP MB Set the built in selector switch Distributor resistor of 100 Ω 1 2 W not supplied Connect a terminal FX3G 485 BD RJ PU RJ45 connector Distributor BMJ 8 28N Terminal resistor selector switch 110Ω Wiring circuit ...

Page 382: ...o the most distant inverter Connect a terminal resistor of For the pin arrangement in the connector refer to the connection diagram for one inverter FX3G 485 BD RJ PU RJ45 connector Distributor BMJ 8 28N Terminal resistor selector switch 110Ω Wiring circuit switch 2 pair PLC Inverter 5 4 3 6 1 RDA RDB SDA SDB SG Terminal resistor 2 7 8 5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8 5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8 5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8 5 4 3 6 1 2 7 ...

Page 383: ...D RJ PLC Inverter PU RS 485 connector 10BASE T cable Modular jack When seen from inverter front receptacle side Terminal resistor 110 FX3U 485 BD FX3G 485 BD FX3U 485ADP MB Set the built in selector switch Distributor resistor of 100 1 2 W not supplied Connect a terminal FX3G 485 BD RJ PU RJ45 connector Distributor BMJ 8 28N Terminal resistor selector switch 110Ω Wiring circuit switch 1 pair PLC I...

Page 384: ...o the most distant inverter Connect a terminal resistor of For the pin arrangement in the connector refer to the connection diagram for one inverter FX3G 485 BD RJ PU RJ45 connector Distributor BMJ 8 28N Terminal resistor selector switch 110Ω Wiring circuit switch 1 pair PLC Inverter 5 4 3 6 1 RDA RDB SDA SDB SG 2 7 8 5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8 5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8 5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8 5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8 SDA SDB RDA RDB ...

Page 385: ...ted 4 wire type PLC Inverter Terminal resistor 110 FX3U 485 BD FX3G 485 BD FX3U 485ADP MB Set the built in selector switch 0 3mm2 or more 0 3mm2 or more Twisted pair cable Set the terminal resistor switch to the 100 side Terminal arrangement Terminal block Connect them to PLC communication unit PLC Inverter Inverter Inverter Terminal resistor 110 FX3U 485 BD FX3G 485 BD FX3U 485ADP MB Set the buil...

Page 386: ...s shown below 4 wire type When connecting a 100 terminal resistor set the switch to the 100 side To next station inverter For crossover wiring of a shielded cable using the terminal SG set the terminal 2 SG selector switch to the right side ON to change over the terminal 2 to the terminal SG By this setting analog inputs to the terminal 2 become invalid PLC ...

Page 387: ...he terminal resistor switch to the 100 side Terminal arrangement Terminal block Connect them to PLC communication unit Crossover wiring Crossover wiring Crossover wiring PLC Inverter Inverter Inverter Terminal resistor 110 FX3U 485 BD FX3G 485 BD FX3U 485ADP MB Set the built in selector switch For the pin arrangement of the connector refer to the connection diagram above for one inverter 0 3mm2 or...

Page 388: ...elector switch RDA RDB SDA SDB SG S D B 2 S D B 1 S G R D B 2 R D B 1 S G S D A 2 S D B 2 S D B 1 S D A 1 S G R D A 2 R D B 2 R D B 1 R D A 1 S G R D A 1 R D B 1 S D B 1 S D A 1 S G S D A 1 S D A 2 R D A 1 R D A 2 FX3G 485 BD FX3U 485 BD FX3U 485ADP MB Terminal resistor 110 0 3mm2 or more Class D grounding Class D grounding Class D grounding Inverter Inverter Inverter PLC Twisted pair cable 0 3mm2...

Page 389: ... switch to 1 pair 2 pair 4 9 Grounding Grounding should be performed as stated below The grounding resistance should be 100 or less Independent grounding should be performed for best results When independent grounding can not be performed perform shared grounding as shown in the following figure For details refer to the Hardware Edition of each series The grounding wire size should be AWG 14 2 mm2...

Page 390: ...arameters are changed by mistake they should be set again 5 1 Communication Port and Applicable Parameters When connecting an inverter to a PLC it is necessary to set parameters corresponding to the communication port in advance S500 Series E500 Series A500 F500 and V500 Series Remove the surface cover Remove the operation panel Remove the operation panel F700 and A700 Series E700 Series Remove th...

Page 391: ...er link Pr79 Pr331 to Pr342 5 5 F500 Series Models with built in PU port PU port Pr79 Pr117 to Pr124 5 4 Option FR A5NR computer link Pr79 Pr331 to Pr342 5 5 V500 Series Models with built in PU port PU port Pr79 Pr117 to Pr124 5 4 Option FR A5NR computer link Pr79 Pr331 to Pr342 5 5 D700 Series Models having built in PU port PU port Pr79 Pr117 to Pr124 Pr340 Pr549 5 6 E700 Series Models having bui...

Page 392: ...em Set value Setting contents n1 Communication station number 00 to 31 Up to eight inverters can be connected n2 Communication speed 48 4800 bps 96 9600 bps 192 19200 bps standard n3 Stop bit length 10 Data length 7 bit Stop bit 1 bit n4 Parity check presence absence 2 Even parity present n7 Wait time setting Set with communication data n11 CR LF selection 1 With CR without LF Pr79 Operation mode ...

Page 393: ... and the operation mode Confirm that the operation is stopped that the RUN indicator is OFF 2 Selecting the parameter setting mode Press the MODE key and select the parameter setting mode 3 Setting the set value of Pr 30 to 1 This step is not necessary if Pr 30 is already set to 1 1 Turn the setting dial to display P30 2 Press the SET key to read the currently set value 3 Turn the setting dial to ...

Page 394: ...ps Turn the setting dial to display n2 Press the SET key to read the currently set value Turn the setting dial to change the set value to 192 Press the SET key to set 192 When the set value and parameter number are displayed alternately the setting is completed 5 Changing other parameters in the same way as step 4 For details on the parameters to be set refer to Subsection 5 2 1 The set value and ...

Page 395: ...if any value other than 0 is set to Pr37 without regard to the setting of the instruction code HFF 2 When changing the frequency from the PLC set 1 or 9999 Parameter No Parameter item Set value Setting contents Pr117 Communication station number 00 to 31 Up to eight inverters can be connected Pr118 Communication speed 48 4800 bps 96 9600 bps 192 19200 bps standard Pr119 Stop bit Data length 10 Dat...

Page 396: ...cting the parameter setting mode Press the MODE key and select the parameter setting mode 1 The frequency setting mode is displayed only in the PU operation mode 3 Reading the parameter Pr 118 There are two methods to read the parameter number Method to read the parameter number using the UP and DOWN keys Press the UP and DOWN keys and display the parameter number to be read When the cover is clos...

Page 397: ...N keys b Press the SET key to flash the middle digit Set a numeric value using the UP and DOWN keys c Press the SET key to flash the least significant digit Set a numeric value using the UP and DOWN keys 4 Setting the set value of Pr 118 to 192 192 indicates the baud rate of 19200 bps 1 Press the SET key to read the currently set value Change the set value using the UP and DOWN keys 2 Press and ho...

Page 398: ...ting contents Pr117 Communication station number 00 to 31 Up to eight inverters can be connected Pr118 Communication speed 48 4800 bps 96 9600 bps 192 19200 bps standard Pr119 Stop bit length data length 10 Data length 7 bit Stop bit 1 bit Pr120 Parity check presence absence 2 2 Even parity Pr123 Waiting time setting 9999 Set in communication data Pr124 CR LF presence absence selection 1 CR Provid...

Page 399: ...Confirm that the operation is stopped that both the REV and FWD indicators are Off 2 Selecting the parameter setting mode Press the MODE key and select the parameter setting mode 1 The frequency setting mode is displayed only during the PU operation mode 3 Reading the parameter Pr 118 There are two methods to read the parameter number Method to read the parameter number using the UP and DOWN keys ...

Page 400: ...keys 4 Setting the set value of Pr 118 to 192 192 indicates the baud rate of 19200 bps 1 Press the SET key to read the currently set value Change the set value using the UP and DOWN keys 2 Press and hold the SET key for 1 5 seconds to set 192 3 Press the SET key to display the next parameter 5 Changing other parameters in the same way as step 3 For details on the parameters to be set refer to Subs...

Page 401: ...r the V500 F500 and A500 Series connection to the PU port For the parameter setting method refer to Subsection 5 4 2 Parameter No Parameter item Set value Setting contents Pr331 Communication station number 00 to 31 Up to eight inverters can be connected Pr332 Communication speed 48 4800 bps 96 9600 bps standard 192 19200 bps Pr333 Stop bit Data length 10 Data length 7 bit Stop bit 1 bit Pr334 Par...

Page 402: ...ration mode selection 0 External operation mode is selected when power is turned ON Pr549 Protocol selection 0 Mitsubishi inverter computer link operation protocol Pr340 Communication startup mode selection 1 or 10 1 Network operation mode 10 Network operation mode Operation mode can be changed between the PU operation mode and network operation mode from the operation panel Parameter No Parameter...

Page 403: ...r the method of use refer to the respective inverter manual 1 This inverter communication function cannot read or write Pr37 Set Pr37 to 0 when setting or monitoring the frequency in the PLC If any value other than 0 is set to Pr37 and the instruction code HFF is set to 01 the frequency may not be set or monitored normally 2 Set Pr146 to 1 when changing the frequency from the PLC Parameter No Para...

Page 404: ...on is stopped that the RUN indicator is off 2 Selecting the parameter setting mode Press the MODE key and select the parameter setting mode 3 Setting the parameter Pr 160 to 0 This step is not required if Pr 160 is already set to 0 1 Turn the setting dial until Pr 160 is displayed 2 Press the SET key to read the current set value 3 Turn the setting dial and change the set value to 0 Operating stat...

Page 405: ...e and parameter number are displayed alternately and the setting is completed 4 Setting the parameter Pr 118 to 192 192 indicates the baud rate of 19200 bps Turn the setting dial until Pr 118 is displayed Press the SET key to read the current set value Turn the setting dial and change the set value to 192 Press the SET key to determine the set value The set value and parameter number are displayed...

Page 406: ...92 19200 bps 384 38400 bps Pr333 RS 485 communication stop bit length 10 Data length 7 bit Stop bit 1 bit Pr334 RS 485 communication parity check selection 2 2 Even parity Pr337 RS 485 communication waiting time setting 9999 Set in communication data Pr341 RS 485 communication CR LF selection 1 CR Provided LF Not provided Pr79 Operation mode selection 0 External operation mode is selected when pow...

Page 407: ...bps 1 Confirming the RUN indicator and the operation mode indicator Confirm that the operation is stopped that the RUN indicator is off 2 Selecting the parameter setting mode Press the MODE key and select the parameter setting mode 3 Setting the parameter Pr 160 to 0 This step is not required if Pr 160 is already set to 0 1 Turn the setting dial until Pr 160 is displayed 2 Press the SET key to rea...

Page 408: ...2 indicates the baud rate of 19200 bps Turn the setting dial until Pr 332 is displayed Press the SET key to read the current set value Turn the setting dial and change the set value to 192 Press the SET key to determine the set value The set value and parameter number are displayed alternately and the setting is completed 5 Change other parameters in the same way as step 4 For details on the param...

Page 409: ...bps Pr333 RS 485 communication stop bit length data length 10 Data length 7 bit Stop bit 1 bit N032 RS 485 communication data length 1 Data length 7 bits N033 RS 485 communication stop bit length 0 Stop bit 1 bit Pr334 N034 RS 485 communication parity check selection 2 2 Even parity Pr337 N037 RS 485 communication waiting time setting 9999 Set in communication data Pr341 N038 RS 485 communication ...

Page 410: ...Press the MODE key and select the parameter setting mode 3 Setting the parameter Pr 160 to 0 This step is not required if Pr 160 is already set to 0 1 Turn the setting dial until Pr 160 is displayed 2 Press the SET key to read the current set value 3 Turn the setting dial and change the set value to 0 Hz FR DU08 PU EXT NET MON PRM IM PM P RUN STOP STOP REV REV FWD FWD ESC SET MODE PU EXT RESET RES...

Page 411: ...ne the set value The set value and parameter number are displayed alternately and the setting is completed 5 Change other parameters in the same way as step 4 For details on the parameters to be set refer to Subsection 5 8 1 5 9 Cautions on Setting 1 Setting of the communication check time interval and RS 485 communication check time interval Description Set value During adjustment or when communi...

Page 412: ... for inverter communication 6 1 Parameter Assigning Method Use parameters for communication setting in the FX PLC 1 Parameter assigning method Register the communication setting in the sequence programming software parameters and transfer the parameters to the PLC 2 Setting flow Parameter area Program area PLC memory Setting window Parameter method Transferred when power is turned ON D8120 Communi...

Page 413: ... WIN for Windows and FX 30P handy programming panel This section describes how to change parameters with GX Works2 For details on FXGP WIN operating procedure refer to section 6 3 For details on GX Developer operating procedure refer to GX Developer Operating Manual For details on FX 30P operating procedure refer to FX 30P Operation Manual 6 2 1 Operating procedure This subsection explains the ser...

Page 414: ...3U and FX3UC PLCs 2 Check the Operate Communication Setting box 3 Set Protocol to Non procedural Data Length to 7Bit Parity to Even and Stop Bit to 1Bit 4 Set Transmission Speed to either 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 1 and make sure that the set value here is the same as the set value in the inverters 5 Ignore these items 1 This transmission speed is supported only in FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC PL...

Page 415: ...per FXGP WIN for Windows and FX 30P handy programming panel This section describes how to change parameters with FXGP WIN Ch2 cannot be set using FXGP WIN For details on GX Works2 operating procedure refer to section 6 2 For details on GX Developer operating procedure refer to GX Developer Operating Manual For details on FX 30P operating procedure refer to FX 30P Operation Manual 6 3 1 Operating p...

Page 416: ...ng contents are displayed 2 Adjusting serial setting parameter Execute the communication setting as shown below 1 Set Protocol to RS instruction Data bits to 7 Parity to Even and Stop bits to 1 2 Set Transfer speed bps to either 4800 9600 or 19200 and make sure that the set value here is the same as the set value in the inverters 3 Ignore these items 3 Writing a sequence program parameters to the ...

Page 417: ...R instruction is completed and remains ON for 1 scan Turns ON also when execution of instruction is completed if M8156 communication error or parameter error turns ON R M8104 Extension ROM cassette check Remains ON while an extension ROM cassette is attached R M8154 Unused R M8155 Communication port busy Remains ON while the communication port is used by an EXTR instruction R M8156 Communication e...

Page 418: ...ication repeatedly 2 Simultaneous driving of EXTR instructions and communication processing 1 Driving instructions at the same time Two or more EXTR functions K10 to K13 can be programmed and driven at the same time When two or more instructions are driven at the same time during communication the next EXTR instruction in the program is executed after the current communication with an inverter is ...

Page 419: ...instruction is executed after the current instruction is completed 3 M8155 remains OFF until the next EXTR instruction is driven after execution of the current EXTR instruction is completed 2 Cautions on programming When the drive contact for another EXTR instruction is driven by a pulse signal during communication with an inverter the communication is not executed When communicating with inverter...

Page 420: ... of M8156 error flag and D8156 error code M8156 error flag and D8156 error code operate as shown below In the program below a communication error occurs in 1 and 3 and communication is completed normally in 2 Device number Description M8029 Instruction execution complete M8156 Communication error or parameter error D8156 Error code M0 FNC180 EXTR FNC180 EXTR FNC180 EXTR 1 EXTR instruction is not d...

Page 421: ...truction G Non Protocol Communication FX 2N 232IF H Programming Communication I Remote Maintenance Apx A Discontinued models 3 Program examples X000 SET M0 Start command M8156 Communication error D8156 D50 FNC 12 MOV M50 SET M50 M8029 Instruction execution complete D50 FNC180 EXTR M0 RST M0 Error in the 1st instruction X001 SET M1 Start command M8156 Communication error D8156 D51 FNC 12 MOV M51 SE...

Page 422: ...normally When resetting many state relays all at once using ZRST FNC 40 instruction etc make sure that the M8155 communication port busy OFF condition is established 3 Using the EXTR instruction in a program flow The EXTR instruction cannot be used in the following program flows 4 Caution on write during RUN 1 Condition in which the EXTR instruction can be written While the PLC is in the STOP stat...

Page 423: ... the instruction codes refer to the pages explaining computer link in detail in each inverter manual Operand type Bit device Word device Others System User Digit specification System User Index Constant Pointer X Y M T C S KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D V Z Modification K H P Inverter instruction code hexadecimal Read contents Applicable inverter A500 E500 S500 H7B Operation mode H6F Output frequency speed...

Page 424: ...tail in each inverter manual 1 The instruction code HFD inverter reset does not request response from the inverter Accordingly even if inverter reset is executed to a station number in which an inverter is not connected error does not occur It takes about 2 2 seconds to complete execution of inverter reset Operand type Bit device Word device Others System User Digit specification System User Index...

Page 425: ...rogram example of second parameter specification code In the program example shown below the parameter number 201 frequency 201 time 1201 motor rotation direction 2201 is read from the A500 inverter whose station number is 6 Read devices D100 Motor rotation direction D101 Frequency D102 Time Operand type Bit device Word device Others System User Digit specification System User Index Constant Point...

Page 426: ...e shown below data is written from the PLC to parameter number 201 frequency 201 time 1201 motor rotation direction 2201 in the A500 inverter Operand type Bit device Word device Others System User Digit specification System User Index Constant Pointer X Y M T C S KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D V Z Modification K H P S3 S S1 S2 S3 M0 FNC180 EXTR K13 K6 K7 D160 S S1 S2 S3 Command contact Function number K13 ...

Page 427: ...n read or written 7 7 1 S500 Series 1 Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers C2 to C7 7 7 2 E500 Series 1 Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers 902 to 905 Parameter No Name Second parameter specification code Value to be specified in in EXTR instruction for parameter No decimal C2 Frequency setting voltage bias frequency 902 C3 Frequency setting voltage bia...

Page 428: ... 1210 2210 211 Program set 2 211 1211 2211 212 Program set 2 212 1212 2212 213 Program set 2 213 1213 2213 214 Program set 2 214 1214 2214 215 Program set 2 215 1215 2215 216 Program set 2 216 1216 2216 217 Program set 2 217 1217 2217 218 Program set 2 218 1218 2218 219 Program set 2 219 1219 2219 220 Program set 2 220 1220 2220 221 Program set 3 221 1221 2221 222 Program set 3 222 1222 2222 223 P...

Page 429: ...his chapter explains practical programs for inverter communication 8 1 Practical Example 1 This fundamental program example monitors operations of an inverter controls operations of an inverter and writes parameters to an inverter 8 1 1 System configuration example An FX PLC is connected to an inverter 8 1 2 Contents of operation As an example of operation control an inverter can be stopped X000 r...

Page 430: ...NC180 EXTR K13 K0 K2 K500 FNC180 EXTR K13 K0 K7 K10 FNC180 EXTR K13 K0 K8 K10 FNC180 EXTR K13 K0 RST M10 The write instruction is driven The maximum frequency is set to 120 Hz The minimum frequency is set to 5 Hz The acceleration time is set to 1 s The deceleration time is set to 1 s H0FD H9696 FNC180 EXTR K11 K0 The inverter is reset M8000 K6000 D10 RUN monitor Operation speed M18 Command for swi...

Page 431: ... an inverter X000 SET M15 Operation stop command input Operation stop Operation stop is reset by input X001 or X002 b1 of H0FA is set to ON H0FA is set to 00H RST M15 Operation stop Forward rotation command Forward rotation command input b2 of H0FA is set to ON Operation command is written M27 to M20 H0FA X002 X001 X002 Reverse rotation command input X000 Operation stop command input M21 M15 Opera...

Page 432: ...Inverter status is read H7A M107 to M100 Indicator lamp etc Frequency monitor value M100 Inverter running H07A K2M100 FNC180 EXTR K10 K0 Y000 Y001 Indicator lamp etc Y002 Indicator lamp etc Indicator lamp etc Y003 Y004 Indicator lamp etc Y006 Indicator lamp etc Y007 Indicator lamp etc M102 Reverse rotation M103 Up to frequency M104 Overload is applied M106 Frequency is detected M107 Alarm occurren...

Page 433: ...program executes the same control as practical example 1 shown above 8 2 1 System configuration example An FX PLC is connected to an inverter 8 2 2 Contents of operation The differences from practical example 1 are that the inverter status is not read while data is written to an inverter and that the contents to be written are detected and written to an inverter only when the contents to be writte...

Page 434: ...10 Initial pulse The write instruction is driven Driving of write instruction M8029 Instruction execute complete M10 H0FB H0 1 FNC180 EXTR K11 K0 Computer link operation is specified K1 K12000 FNC180 EXTR K13 K0 K2 K500 FNC180 EXTR K13 K0 K7 K10 FNC180 EXTR K13 K0 K8 K10 FNC180 EXTR K13 K0 RST M10 The write instruction is driven The maximum frequency is set to 120Hz The minimum frequency is set to...

Page 435: ...ching to speed 2 The operation speed is written as 40 Hz The operation speed is written as 20 Hz The preset frequency is written to the inverter FNC 12 MOV 60 Hz is written as the initial value at startup K4000 D10 FNC 12 MOV K2000 D10 FNC 12 MOV Operation speed Operation speed Operation speed M17 Command for switching to speed 1 M8002 Initial pulse D10 D80 FNC 12 MOV Operation speed Operation spe...

Page 436: ...0 EXTR K11 K0 Operation commands are written M27 to M20 H0FA X002 X001 X002 Reverse rotation command input X000 Operation stop command input M21 M15 Operation stop X001 X002 X001 Forward rotation command input Reverse rotation command input Reverse rotation command input Forward rotation command input M12 Driving of write instruction M22 Reverse rotation command K2M20 D81 FNC 12 MOV Operation comm...

Page 437: ...tion H06F D50 FNC180 EXTR K10 K0 Inverter status is read H07A M107 to M100 Indicator lamp etc Frequency monitor value M100 Inverter running H07A K2M100 FNC180 EXTR K10 K0 Y000 Y001 Indicator lamp etc Y002 Indicator lamp etc Indicator lamp etc Y003 Y004 Indicator lamp etc Y006 Indicator lamp etc Y007 Indicator lamp etc M102 Reverse rotation M103 Up to frequency M104 Overload is applied M106 Frequen...

Page 438: ...wer supply is turned from OFF to ON 7 Cleared when the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN 8 The IVBWR instruction is supported only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs Function FX2N FX2NC FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Monitoring operation of an inverter EXTR K10 IVCK Controlling operation of an inverter EXTR K11 IVDR Reading parameters from an inverter EXTR K12 IVRD Writing parameters to an inverter EXTR K13 IV...

Page 439: ...n Turns ON also when execution of instruction is completed if inverter communication error flag M8152 or M8157 turns ON R M8063 M8438 Serial communication error 1 Turns ON when an error occurs in any type of communication R M8151 M8156 Inverter communicating Remains ON while inverter communication is being executed R M8152 M8157 Inverter communication error 2 Turns ON when an error occurs during c...

Page 440: ...or more IVCK FNC270 to IVMC FNC275 instructions can be programmed and driven at the same time When two or more instructions are driven at the same time in the channel used for communication the latter inverter communication instruction in the program is executed after the current communication with the inverter has finished Instruction Function Control direction Detailed explanation IVCK FNC270 Mo...

Page 441: ...OFF because the drive contact is OFF 2 When two or more instructions are driven at the same time during communication the next inverter communication instruction is executed after the current instruction is completed 3 M8151 remains OFF until the next inverter communication instruction is driven after execution of the current inverter communication instruction is completed 2 Cautions on programmin...

Page 442: ... column turns ON when an error occurs during communication with an inverter When inverter communication error flag turns ON the step number is stored in the inverter communication error occurrence step device D8153 or D8158 Create the program shown below for each corresponding instruction to check the inverter communication error code stored in D8152 or D8157 Device number Description Device numbe...

Page 443: ...C Parallel Link D Computer Link E Inverter Communication F Non Protocol Communication RS RS2 Instruction G Non Protocol Communication FX 2N 232IF H Programming Communication I Remote Maintenance Apx A Discontinued models 3 Program example X000 SET M0 Start command M8152 Communication error D8152 D50 FNC 12 MOV M50 SET M50 M8029 Instruction execution complete D50 K1 FNC277 IVWR M0 RST M0 Instructio...

Page 444: ...etc make sure that the M8151 or M8156 communication port busy condition is OFF 3 Using an inverter communication instruction in a program flow An inverter communication instruction cannot be used in the following program flows 4 Caution on writing during RUN 1 Condition in which inverter communication instruction can be written While the PLC is in the STOP status inverter communication instruction...

Page 445: ...r297 Cases in which a password reset error occurs in an inverter communication instruction and the actual number of times of reset error in such cases When a wrong password is written to Pr297 due to a password input error When the writing instruction is executed once a password reset error occurs 3 times When the password cannot be written correctly to Pr297 due to noise etc A password reset erro...

Page 446: ...fore the IVCK instruction when reading frequency When 0 is not written reading of the frequency may not be executed normally Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P 1 2 1 2 1 2 n Inverter Instruction code hexadecimal Rea...

Page 447: ...er reset does not request a response from the inverter Accordingly even if inverter reset is executed to a station number at which an inverter is not connected error does not occur It takes about 2 2 seconds to complete execution of inverter reset 2 When resetting the inverter please specify H9696 as the operand of the IVDR instruction Do not use H9966 3 Please write 0 to instruction code HFF Link...

Page 448: ... 9 6 2 Inverter instruction codes Refer to related data shown later 9 6 3 Program example of second parameter specification code For second parameter specification code refer to Section 9 9 In the program example shown below the parameters frequency 201 time 1201 motor rotation direction 2201 are read from the A500 inverter whose station number is 6 Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others Sy...

Page 449: ...tion FX 2N 232IF H Programming Communication I Remote Maintenance Apx A Discontinued models Read devices D100 Motor rotation direction D101 Frequency D102 Time M0 FNC272 IVRD K6 K2201 D100 S1 S2 D Drive contact Inverter station number 0 to 31 Read value storage destination Inverter parameter number decimal FNC272 IVRD K6 K201 D101 FNC272 IVRD K6 K1201 D102 M8029 RST M0 Execution complete flag Moto...

Page 450: ...efer to Section 9 9 In the program example shown below data is written from the PLC to the parameters frequency 201 time 1201 motor rotation direction 2201 in the A500 inverter Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P 1 2...

Page 451: ...nd later are written to the specified items in the inverter all at once 1 Applicable devices 2 Program example The following table shows values two word devices point in a specified table which are written to a number of consecutive parameters specified in starting from a word device specified in Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit...

Page 452: ...es Two devices are occupied respectively by and Make sure not to use those devices in another control PLC Applicable version FX3S Ver 1 00 or later FX3G FX3GC Ver 1 40 or later FX3U FX3UC Ver 2 70 or later Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D...

Page 453: ...xt or later read instruction IVCK or IVMC 9 9 2 Applicable inverters This instruction is applicable to the following inverters FREQROL A800 Applicable in all FREQROL F800 Applicable in all FREQROL E700 February 2009 and later FREQROL D700 Applicable in all For details refer to the respective inverter manual 9 9 3 Applicable programming tool The following programming tools support this instruction ...

Page 454: ...eter numbers C2 to C7 9 10 2 E500 Series 1 Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers 902 to 905 Parameter No Name Second parameter specification code decimal value to be specified in in IVRD IVWR instruction for parameter number C2 Frequency setting voltage bias frequency 902 C3 Frequency setting voltage bias 1902 C4 Frequency setting voltage gain 903 C5 Frequency setting current ...

Page 455: ...am set 1 206 1206 2206 207 Program set 1 207 1207 2207 208 Program set 1 208 1208 2208 209 Program set 1 209 1209 2209 210 Program set 1 210 1210 2210 211 Program set 2 211 1211 2211 212 Program set 2 212 1212 2212 213 Program set 2 213 1213 2213 214 Program set 2 214 1214 2214 215 Program set 2 215 1215 2215 216 Program set 2 216 1216 2216 217 Program set 2 217 1217 2217 218 Program set 2 218 121...

Page 456: ... Second parameter specification code decimal value to be specified in in IVRD IVWR instruction for parameter number Offset Gain H00 Analog H01 Analog value of terminal H02 902 Speed setting No 2 bias 902 1902 2902 903 Speed setting No 2 gain 903 1903 2903 904 Torque command No 3 bias 904 1904 2904 905 Torque command No 3 gain 905 1905 2905 917 No 1 terminal bias speed 917 1917 2917 918 No 1 termin...

Page 457: ...Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency 902 C3 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 1902 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency 903 C4 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 1903 C5 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency 904 C6 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 1904 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 905 C7 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 1905 C12 Bias frequency speed for ...

Page 458: ...02 Only the IVRD instruction 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency 903 C4 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 1903 Terminal 2 analog value 2903 Only the IVRD instruction C5 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency 904 C6 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 1904 Terminal 4 analog value 2904 Only the IVRD instruction 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 905 C7 Terminal 4 frequenc...

Page 459: ...quency setting gain frequency 903 C4 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 1903 C5 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency 904 C6 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 1904 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 905 C7 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 1905 C12 Terminal 1 bias frequency speed 917 C13 Terminal 1 bias speed 1917 C14 Terminal 1 gain frequency speed 918 C15 Terminal 1 gain speed ...

Page 460: ...04 C6 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 1904 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 905 C7 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 1905 C12 Terminal 1 bias frequency speed 917 C13 Terminal 1 bias speed 1917 C14 Terminal 1 gain frequency speed 918 C15 Terminal 1 gain speed 1918 C16 Terminal 1 bias command torque 919 C17 Terminal 1 bias torque 1919 C18 Terminal 1 gain command torque 920 C19 Termi...

Page 461: ...controls operations of the inverter and writes parameters to the inverter Programs can be made simpler and the communication time can be reduced by using the IVMC instruction as long as the PLC and inverter support the IVMC instruction For details on PLC versions support the IVMC instruction refer to section 9 9 Refer to 9 9 2 Applicable inverters for supported inverters 10 1 1 System configuratio...

Page 462: ... P FNC 12 MOV K2 D202 P FNC 12 MOV K500 D203 P FNC 12 MOV K7 D204 P FNC 12 MOV K10 D205 P FNC 12 MOV K8 D206 P FNC 12 MOV K10 D207 P FNC274 IVBWR 2 K0 K4 D200 K1 The write instruction is driven Driving of write instruction M10 M8029 RST M10 The inverter is reset Computer link operation is specified The maximum frequency Pr 1 is specified The maximum frequency Pr 1 is set to 120 Hz The minimum freq...

Page 463: ... set frequency in the program When the IVMC instruction is used M8000 FNC271 IVDR K0 H0ED D10 K1 RUN monitor FNC 12 MOV K4000 D10 P Operation speed The operation speed 40 Hz is written The preset frequency 1 is written to the inverter FNC 12 MOV K6000 D10 P FNC 12 MOV K2000 D10 P Operation speed Operation speed Operation speed 60 Hz is written as the initial value at startup The operation speed 20...

Page 464: ...nd input Operation stop Forward rotation command Reverse rotation command H0FA is set to 00H Operation stop is reset by input X001 or X002 b1 of H0FA is set to ON b2 of H0FA is set to ON Operation command is written M27 to M20 H0FA X000 FNC 12 MOV K4M20 D10 Operation stop command input SET M15 RST M15 X000 X001 X002 M15 X001 X002 M21 X002 X001 M22 M8000 RUN monitor Forward rotation command input O...

Page 465: ...er status monitor extended Use the command code H7A Inverter status monitor 2 For the V500 Series inverter write 0 to instruction code HFF Link parameter expansion setting just before reading the output frequency monitor in the program M8000 FNC270 IVCK K0 H079 1 K4M100 K1 RUN monitor Y000 M100 Y001 M101 Y002 M102 Y003 M103 Y004 M104 Y006 M106 Y007 M107 FNC270 IVCK K0 H06F D50 K1 END Inverter stat...

Page 466: ... D10 D20 K1 RUN monitor Y000 M100 Y001 M101 Y002 M102 Y003 M103 Y004 M104 Y006 M106 Y007 M107 FNC 12 MOV D21 D50 FNC 12 MOV D20 K4M100 END The set frequency RAM and run command expansion are written The inverter status monitor expansion and output frequency speed are read 1 The inverter status monitor expansion is stored in bit devices Inverter is operating Forward rotation Reverse rotation Up to ...

Page 467: ...as practical example 1 shown earlier from one communication port ch1 to two inverters Station number 0 and 1 10 2 1 System configuration example An FX PLC ch1 is connected to two inverters Station number 0 and 1 10 2 2 Contents of operation Differences from the practical example 1 are the following three points The PLC executes communication from one communication port to two inverters Status is n...

Page 468: ...d station number 0 The maximum frequency Pr 1 is set to 120 Hz station number 0 The minimum frequency Pr 2 is specified station number 0 The minimum frequency Pr 2 is set to 5 Hz station number 0 The acceleration time Pr 7 is specified station number 0 The acceleration time Pr 7 is set to 1 sec station number 0 The deceleration time Pr 8 is specified station number 0 The deceleration time Pr 8 is ...

Page 469: ...3 P FNC 12 MOV K7 D704 P FNC 12 MOV K10 D705 P FNC 12 MOV K8 D706 P FNC 12 MOV K10 D707 P FNC274 IVBWR 2 K1 K4 D700 K1 Driving of write instruction station number 1 M510 M8029 RST M510 The inverter is reset station number 1 Computer link operation is specified station number 1 The maximum frequency Pr 1 is specified station number 1 The maximum frequency Pr 1 is set to 120 Hz station number 1 The ...

Page 470: ...et frequency 1 is written to the inverter FNC 12 MOV 60 Hz is written as the initial value at startup K4000 D10 FNC 12 MOV K2000 D10 FNC 12 MOV Operation speed station number 0 Operation speed station number 0 M17 Command for switching to speed 1 station number 0 M8002 Initial pulse D10 D80 FNC 12 MOV Operation speed station number 0 Operation speed is withdrawn station number 0 SET M11 The write ...

Page 471: ...d is written as 40 Hz D510 K1 FNC271 IVDR K1 H0ED The operation speed is written as 20 Hz The preset frequency 1 is written to the inverter FNC 12 MOV 60 Hz is written as the initial value at startup K4000 FNC 12 MOV K2000 FNC 12 MOV Operation speed station number 1 Operation speed station number 1 M517 Command for switching to speed 1 station number 1 M8002 Initial pulse D510 D580 FNC 12 MOV Oper...

Page 472: ...2M20 K1 FNC271 IVDR K0 H0FA Operation commands are written M27 to M20 H0FA X002 X001 X002 Reverse rotation command input X000 Operation stop command input M21 M15 Operation stop X001 X002 X001 Forward rotation command input Reverse rotation command input Reverse rotation command input Forward rotation command input M12 Driving of write instruction M22 Reverse rotation command K2M20 D81 FNC 12 MOV ...

Page 473: ... to 00H RST M515 Forward rotation command Forward rotation command input b2 of H0FA is set to ON K2M520 K1 FNC271 IVDR K1 H0FA Operation commands are written M527 to M520 H0FA X012 X011 X012 Reverse rotation command input X010 Operation stop command input M521 M515 Operation stop X011 X012 X011 Forward rotation command input Reverse rotation command input Reverse rotation command input Forward rot...

Page 474: ... lamp etc Frequency monitor value M100 Inverter running station number 0 station number 0 station number 0 station number 0 station number 0 station number 0 station number 0 station number 0 station number 0 station number 0 K4M100 K1 FNC270 IVCK K0 H079 1 Y000 Y001 Indicator lamp etc Y002 Indicator lamp etc Indicator lamp etc Y003 Y004 Indicator lamp etc Y006 Indicator lamp etc Y007 Indicator la...

Page 475: ...ating M601 Forward rotation D550 K1 FNC270 IVCK K1 H06F Inverter status is read station number 1 Indicator lamp etc Frequency monitor value M600 Inverter running station number 1 station number 1 station number 1 station number 1 station number 1 station number 1 station number 1 station number 1 station number 1 station number 1 K4M600 K1 FNC270 IVCK K1 H079 1 Y010 Y011 Indicator lamp etc Y012 In...

Page 476: ...ommunication equipment is correct If the communication equipment is wired incorrectly communication is not possible For wiring method check refer to Chapter 4 11 4 Checking Sequence Program 1 Communication setting in the sequence program Verify that N N Network D8173 to D8180 and parallel link M8070 and M8071 are not set After changing any setting make sure to turn OFF the PLC power and then turn ...

Page 477: ...X3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC PLCs Verify that the RS and RS2 instructions are not being used for the same channel If these instructions are used for the same channel delete them turn OFF the PLC power and then turn the power ON again 7 Presence of ADPRW instructions in FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC PLCs Verify that the ADPRW instructions are not being used for the same channel If these instructions a...

Page 478: ...s being used for another communication type it cannot be used for communication with the inverter At this time error code K6762 is set to D8067 K6762 The port specified in inverter communication instruction is being used by another communication type 7 Station number outside setting range A value outside the allowable range is set to the station number At this time error code K6706 is set to D8067...

Page 479: ... to 9 A to F and control codes was received Inverter does not accept received data but is not brought to an alarm stop 264 Undefined Inverter sent the error code H8 Not defined currently in inverter 265 Undefined Inverter sent the error code H9 Not defined currently in inverter 266 Mode error Inverter sent the error code HA A parameter was written in a mode other than computer link mode or while t...

Page 480: ...rm stop HB The inverter sent error code HB to send data 1 of the IVMC instruction Non existing instruction code was specified HC The inverter sent error code HC to send data 1 of the IVMC instruction Data outside the allowable range was specified HA H0 The inverter sent error code HA to send data 2 of the IVMC instruction A parameter was written in a mode other than computer link mode or while inv...

Page 481: ...uction is completed if M8156 communication error or parameter error turns ON R M8104 Extension ROM cassette check Remains ON while an extension ROM cassette is attached R M8154 Unused R M8155 Communication port busy Remains ON while the communication port is used by an EXTR instruction R M8156 Communication error or parameter error Turns ON when a communication error is caused by an EXTR instructi...

Page 482: ...ROM cassette is attached 1 Detailed contents M8104 remains ON while an extension ROM cassette is attached FX2N FX2N ROM E1 FX2NC FX2NC ROM CE1 2 Cautions on use While M8104 is OFF EXTR instructions cannot be used 12 2 3 Communication port busy M8155 This device remains ON while the communication port is being used by an EXTR instruction 1 Detailed contents M8155 remains ON while communication with...

Page 483: ...ode D8104 This device stores the type code of an extension ROM cassette 1 Detailed contents While the following ROM is attached to an FX PLC D8104 stores its model code FX2N FX2N ROM E1 model code K1 FX2NC FX2NC ROM CE1 model code K1 12 2 7 Extension ROM cassette version D8105 This device stores the version of an extension ROM cassette 1 Detailed contents While an extension ROM is attached D8105 s...

Page 484: ...r An error was included in the transfer request data from the computer beyond the allowable number of retries When errors have occurred consecutively beyond the allowable number of retries inverter is brought to an alarm stop 257 Inverter sent the error code H1 Parity error The contents are different from the specified parity 258 Inverter sent the error code H2 Sum check error The sum check code i...

Page 485: ...ch an error occurred first When no error has occurred D8157 stores 1 266 Inverter sent the error code HA Mode error A parameter was written in a mode other than computer link mode or while inverter was operating Inverter does not accept the received data but is not stopped by alarm Inverter does not accept the received data but is not brought to an alarm stop 267 Inverter sent the error code HB In...

Page 486: ...r communication error flag M8152 or M8157 turns ON R M8063 M8438 Serial communication error 1 Turns ON when an error occurs in any type of communication R M8151 M8156 Inverter communicating Remains ON while inverter communication is being executed R M8152 M8157 Inverter communication error 2 Turns ON when an error occurs during communication with an inverter R M8153 M8158 Inverter communication er...

Page 487: ...is to be checked 12 4 2 Serial communication error M8063 and M8438 These devices turn ON when an error occurs during communication with an inverter 1 Detailed contents M8063 or M8438 turns ON when a parity error overrun error or framing error occurs during communication with inverters or when on inverter communication error occurs M8063 turns ON when an error occurs during communication using ch1 ...

Page 488: ...cified in IVBWR instruction is outside the allowable range M8154 turns ON when an error occurs in IVBWR instruction using communication port ch1 When M8154 turns ON D8154 stores the rejected parameter number M8159 turns ON when an error occurs in IVBWR instruction using the communication port ch2 When M8159 turns ON D8159 stores the rejected parameter number 2 Cautions on use IVBWR instruction err...

Page 489: ...aused by an inverter communication instruction 1 Detailed contents Special data registers shown below respectively store inverter communication errors depending on each communication port D8152 stores the error code of an error in communication using communication port ch1 D8157 stores the error code of an error in communication using communication port ch2 2 Error codes The following error codes ...

Page 490: ...run error Before receiving the completed data in the inverter the computer sent the next set of data 262 Inverter sent the error code H6 Not defined currently in inverter 263 Inverter sent the error code H7 Character error An unused character other than 0 to 9 A to F and control codes is received Inverter does not accept the received data but is not brought to an alarm stop 264 Inverter sent the e...

Page 491: ...did not accept the received data but was not stopped by alarm The inverter accepts data corresponding to send data 2 and is not brought to an alarm stop HB The inverter sent error code HB to send data 1 of the IVMC instruction Non existing instruction code was specified HC The inverter sent error code HC to send data 1 of the IVMC instruction Data outside the allowable range was specified HA H0 Th...

Page 492: ...as occurred when IVBWR instruction error flag M8154 or M8159 turns ON 1 Detailed contents D8154 or D8159 stores the parameter number which was not written by IVBWR instruction D8154 stores the parameter number which was not written in communication using communication port ch1 D8159 stores the parameter number which was not written in communication using communication port ch2 When errors that occ...

Page 493: ...w speed simple mode 6 Multi speed setting low speed 6 Multi speed setting low speed 6 Multi speed setting low speed 6 Multi speed setting low speed 7 Acceleration time simple mode 7 Acceleration time 7 Acceleration time 7 Acceleration time 7 Acceleration time 8 Deceleration time simple mode 8 Deceleration time 8 Deceleration time 8 Deceleration time 8 Deceleration time 9 Electronic thermal O L rel...

Page 494: ...duction starting frequency 29 Acceleration deceleration pattern 29 Acceleration deceleration pattern 29 Acceleration deceleration pattern 29 Acceleration deceleration pattern 29 Acceleration deceleration pattern 30 Regenerative function selection 30 Regenerative function selection 30 Regenerative function selection 30 Regenerative function selection 30 Extended function display selection 31 Speed ...

Page 495: ... selection 55 Speed monitoring reference 55 Frequency monitoring reference 55 Frequency monitoring reference 55 Frequency monitoring reference 55 Frequency monitoring reference 56 Current monitoring reference 56 Current monitoring reference 56 Current monitoring reference 56 Current monitoring reference 56 Current monitoring reference Restart 57 Restart coasting time 57 Restart coasting time 57 Re...

Page 496: ...ode output selection 77 Parameter write disable selection simple mode 77 Parameter write disable selection 77 Parameter write disable selection 77 Parameter write disable selection 77 Parameter write disable selection 78 Reverse rotation prevention selection 78 Reverse rotation prevention selection 78 Reverse rotation prevention selection 78 Reverse rotation prevention selection 78 Reverse rotatio...

Page 497: ...n deceleration time 110 Third acceleration deceleration time 111 Third deceleration time 111 Third deceleration time 112 Third torque boost 3 113 Third V F base frequency 3 114 Third stall prevention operation current 115 Third stall prevention operation frequency 116 Third speed detection 116 Third output frequency detection Communi cation functions 117 Communication station number 117 Communicat...

Page 498: ...l power supply inverter switch over sequence output terminal selection 135 Commercial power supply inverter switch over sequence output terminal selection 136 MC switch over interlock time 136 MC switch over interlock time 137 Start waiting time 137 Start waiting time 138 Commercial power supply inverter switch over selection at alarm occurrence 138 Commercial power supply inverter switch over sel...

Page 499: ...n selection 156 Stall prevention operation selection 156 Stall prevention operation selection 157 OL signal output timer 157 OL signal output waiting time 157 OL signal waiting time 158 DA2 terminal function selection 158 AM terminal function selection 158 AM terminal function selection Additional function 160 Extended function selection simple mode 160 User group read selection 160 User group rea...

Page 500: ...al function selection 190 RUN terminal function selection 64 RUN terminal function selection 191 DO2 terminal function selection 191 SU terminal function selection 191 SU terminal function selection 191 FU terminal function selection 192 DO3 terminal function selection 192 IPF terminal function selection 192 IPF terminal function selection 192 A B C terminal function selection 65 A B C terminal fu...

Page 501: ...ting speed 14 239 Multi speed setting speed 15 239 Multi speed setting speed 15 239 Multi speed setting speed 15 87 Multi speed setting speed 15 Sub functions 240 Soft PWM setting 240 Soft PWM setting 240 Soft PWM setting 240 Soft PWM setting 70 Soft PWM setting 244 Cooling fan operation selection 244 Cooling fan operation selection 244 Cooling fan operation selection 244 Cooling fan operation sel...

Page 502: ...e opening current 4 280 Brake opening current detection time 280 Brake opening current detection time 4 281 Brake operation time at start 281 Brake operation time at start 4 282 Brake operation speed 282 Brake operation frequency 4 283 Brake operation time at stop 283 Brake operation time at stop 4 284 Deceleration detection function selection 284 Deceleration detection function selection 4 285 Ov...

Page 503: ...output 312 Setting for maximum analog meter voltage output 312 Setting for maximum analog meter voltage output 313 Y0 output selection 313 Y0 output selection 313 Y0 output selection 314 Y1 output selection 314 Y1 output selection 314 Y1 output selection 315 Y2 output selection 315 Y2 output selection 315 Y2 output selection 316 Y3 output selection 316 Y3 output selection 316 Y3 output selection 3...

Page 504: ...tartup data lower byte 345 DeviceNet address startup data lower byte 345 DeviceNet address startup data lower byte 346 DeviceNet baud rate lower 346 DeviceNet baud rate startup data lower byte 346 DeviceNet baud rate startup data lower byte 346 DeviceNet baud rate startup data lower byte 347 DeviceNet address higher 347 DeviceNet address startup data higher byte 347 DeviceNet address startup data ...

Page 505: ... selection 380 Acceleration S pattern 1 380 Acceleration S pattern 1 381 Deceleration S pattern 1 381 Deceleration S pattern 1 382 Acceleration S pattern 2 382 Acceleration S pattern 2 383 Deceleration S pattern 2 383 Deceleration S pattern 2 384 Input pulse division scaling factor 384 Input pulse division scaling factor 385 Speed for zero input pulse 385 Frequency for zero input pulse 386 Speed f...

Page 506: ...lection 404 DI15 terminal function selection 405 DI16 terminal function selection 406 High resolution analog input selection 407 Motor temperature detection filter Extension output 410 DO11 terminal function selection 411 DO12 terminal function selection 412 DO13 terminal function selection 413 Encoder pulse output division ratio Positioning control 419 Position command source selection 420 Comman...

Page 507: ... 434 IP address 1 435 IP address 2 436 IP address 3 437 IP address 4 438 Sub net mask 1 439 Sub net mask 2 440 Sub net mask 3 441 Sub net mask 4 442 Gateway address 1 443 Gateway address 2 444 Gateway address 3 445 Gateway address 4 446 Password Torque command 447 Digital torque command bias 448 Digital torque command gain Motor constant 450 Second applied motor 451 Second motor control method sel...

Page 508: ...76 Sixth position feed amount upper 4 digits 477 Seventh position feed amount lower 4 digits 478 Seventh position feed amount upper 4 digits 479 Eighth position feed amount lower 4 digits 480 Eighth position feed amount upper 4 digits 481 Ninth position feed amount lower 4 digits 482 Ninth position feed amount upper 4 digits 483 Tenth position feed amount lower 4 digits 484 Tenth position feed amo...

Page 509: ...NET communication interruption 500 Communication error recognition waiting time 500 Auxiliary motor operation 500 Communication error recognition waiting time 500 Communication error recognition waiting time 501 Communication error occurrence count display 501 Motor switch over selection 501 Communication error occurrence count display 501 Communication error occurrence count display 502 Stop mode...

Page 510: ...nction 800 Control system selection simple mode 801 Torque characteristic selection 802 Pre excitation selection 803 Constant output region torque characteristic selection 804 Torque command source selection 805 Torque command source RAM 806 Torque command source RAM EEPROM 807 Speed restriction selection 808 Forward rotation speed restriction 809 Reverse rotation speed restriction Control system ...

Page 511: ...tting simple mode 819 Easy gain tuning selection simple mode 820 Speed control P gain 1 821 Speed control integral time 1 822 Speed setting filter 1 823 Speed detection filter 1 824 Torque control P gain 1 825 Torque control integral time 1 826 Torque setting filter 1 827 Torque detection filter 1 828 Model speed control gain 830 Speed control P gain 2 831 Speed control integral time 2 832 Speed s...

Page 512: ...ut filter Terminal assign ment function 868 No 1 terminal function assignment Protection functions 870 Speed deviation level 871 Speed deviation time 873 Speed restriction 874 OLT level setting Operation selecting functions 875 Fault definition 876 Thermal relay protector input Control system functions 877 Speed feed forward model adaptive speed control selection 878 Speed feed forward filter 879 ...

Page 513: ...urrent bias 904 Frequency setting current bias 904 Frequency setting current bias C5 904 Frequency setting current bias frequency C6 904 Frequency setting current bias 905 Torque command No 3 gain 905 Frequency setting current gain 905 Frequency setting current gain 905 Frequency setting current gain C7 905 Frequency setting current gain C8 269 Parameter set by manufacturer Do not set 917 No 1 ter...

Page 514: ...rameter Pr 77 is set to 801 6 Can be set only in the 200 V 100 V class 7 Cannot be used in inverter communication 8 This inverter communication function cannot read or write Pr 37 Set Pr 37 to 0 when setting or monitoring the frequency in the PLC If any value other than 0 is set to Pr 37 and the instruction code HFF is set to 01 the frequency may not be set or monitored normally in the 400 V class...

Page 515: ...jection brake operation voltage 12 DC injection brake operation voltage 12 DC injection brake operation voltage 13 Starting frequency 13 Starting frequency 13 Starting frequency 13 Starting frequency 14 Load pattern selection 14 Load pattern selection 14 Load pattern selection 14 Load pattern selection Jog operation 15 Jog frequency 15 Jog frequency 15 Jog frequency 15 Jog frequency 16 Jog acceler...

Page 516: ...d deceleration time 45 Second deceleration time 45 Second deceleration time 45 Second deceleration time 46 Second torque boost 46 Second torque boost 46 Second torque boost 46 Second torque boost 47 Second V F base frequency 47 Second V F base frequency 47 Second V F base frequency 47 Second V F base frequency 48 Second stall prevention operation current 48 Second stall prevention operation curren...

Page 517: ... 73 Analog input selection 73 Analog input selection 74 Input filter time constant 74 Input filter time constant 74 Input filter time constant 74 Input filter time constant 75 Reset selection disconnected PU detection PU stop selection 75 Reset selection disconnected PU detection PU stop selection 75 Reset selection disconnected PU detection PU stop selection 75 Reset selection disconnected PU det...

Page 518: ...on speed 119 PU communication stop bit length 119 PU communication stop bit length 119 PU communication stop bit length 119 PU communication stop bit length 120 PU communication parity check 120 PU communication parity check 120 PU communication parity check 120 PU communication parity check 121 Number of PU communication retries 121 Number of PU communication retries 121 Number of PU communicatio...

Page 519: ...rom inverter to bypass operation Backlash measures 140 Backlash acceleration stopping frequency 140 Backlash acceleration stopping frequency 141 Backlash acceleration stopping time 141 Backlash acceleration stopping time 142 Backlash deceleration stopping frequency 142 Backlash deceleration stopping frequency 143 Backlash deceleration stopping time 143 Backlash deceleration stopping time 144 Speed...

Page 520: ... clear 170 Cumulative power meter clear 170 Watt hour meter clear 170 Watt hour meter clear 170 Watt hour meter clear 171 Operation hour meter clear 171 Operation hour meter clear 171 Operation hour meter clear 171 Operation hour meter clear User group 172 User group registered display batch clear 172 User group registered display batch clear 172 User group registered display batch clear 173 User ...

Page 521: ...Multi speed setting speed 13 237 Multi speed setting speed 13 237 Multi speed setting speed 13 238 Multi speed setting speed 14 238 Multi speed setting speed 14 238 Multi speed setting speed 14 238 Multi speed setting speed 14 239 Multi speed setting speed 15 239 Multi speed setting speed 15 239 Multi speed setting speed 15 239 Multi speed setting speed 15 240 Soft PWM operation selection 240 Soft...

Page 522: ... deceleration start 262 Subtracted frequency at deceleration start 263 Subtraction starting frequency 263 Subtraction starting frequency 264 Power failure deceleration time 1 264 Power failure deceleration time 1 265 Power failure deceleration time 2 265 Power failure deceleration time 2 266 Power failure deceleration time switchover frequency 266 Power failure deceleration time switchover frequen...

Page 523: ...288 Droop function activation selection 291 Pulse train I O selection 292 Automatic acceleration deceleration 292 Automatic acceleration deceleration 293 Acceleration deceleration separate selection 293 Acceleration deceleration separate selection 294 UV avoidance voltage gain 295 Magnitude of frequency change setting 295 Magnitude of frequency change setting Password function 296 Password lock le...

Page 524: ...ction 317 DO4 output selection 318 DO5 output selection 318 DO5 output selection 319 DO6 output selection 319 DO6 output selection Relay output 320 RA1 output selection 320 RA1 output selection 321 RA2 output selection 321 RA2 output selection 322 RA3 output selection 322 RA3 output selection Analog output 323 AM0 0V adjustment 323 AM0 0V adjustment 324 AM1 0mA adjustment 324 AM1 0mA adjustment 32...

Page 525: ...nication EEPROM write selection 342 Communication EEPROM write selection 343 Communication error count 343 Communication error count 343 Communication error count 343 Communication error count DeviceNet 345 DeviceNet address 346 DeviceNet baud rate CC Link 349 Communication reset selection S pattern acceleration deceleration C 380 Acceleration S pattern 1 381 Deceleration S pattern 1 382 Accelerat...

Page 526: ...eleration 518 S pattern time at a start of deceleration 519 S pattern time at a completion of deceleration CC Link 541 Frequency command sign selection CC Link 542 Communication station number CC Link 542 Communication station number CC Link 543 Baud rate CC Link 543 Baud rate selection CC Link 544 CC Link extended setting 544 CC Link extended setting USB 547 USB communication station number 547 U...

Page 527: ...erruption detection level 576 Output interruption detection level 576 Output interruption detection level 577 Output interruption release level 577 Output interruption cancel level 577 Output interruption cancel level 611 Acceleration time at a restart 611 Acceleration time at a restart 611 Acceleration time at a restart 611 Acceleration time at a restart 653 Speed smoothing control 653 Speed smoo...

Page 528: ...36 Torque setting filter2 837 Torque detection filter 2 Torque bias 849 Analog input off set adjustment 850 Control operation selection 858 Terminal 4 function assignment 859 Torque current 859 Torque current 860 Second motor torque current 862 Notch filter time constant 863 Notch filter depth 864 Torque detection 865 Low speed detection Indication function 866 Torque monitoring reference 867 AM o...

Page 529: ...pensation frequency limit value 885 Regenerationavoidance compensation frequency limit value 885 Regenerationavoidance compensation frequency limit value 886 Regeneration avoidance voltage gain 886 Regeneration avoidance voltage gain 886 Regeneration avoidance voltage gain 886 Regenerationavoidance voltage gain Free parameter 888 Free parameter 1 888 Free parameter 1 888 Free parameter 1 888 Free ...

Page 530: ...quency C5 904 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency C5 904 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency C6 904 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias C6 904 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias C6 904 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias C6 904 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 126 905 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 126 905 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 126 905 Terminal 4 freq...

Page 531: ...n the PLC If any value other than 0 is set and the instruction code HFF is set to 01 the frequency may not be set or monitored normally Calibration parameters C38 932 Terminal 4 bias command torque magnetic flux C39 932 Terminal 4 bias torque magnetic flux C40 933 Terminal 4 gain command torque magnetic flux C41 933 Gain torque for terminal No 4 989 Parameter copy alarm release PU 990 PU buzzer co...

Page 532: ... D200 Jog frequency 16 F002 Jog acceleration deceleration time 16 F002 Jog acceleration deceleration time 17 T720 MRS input selection 17 T720 MRS input selection 18 H402 High speed maximum frequency 18 H402 High speed maximum frequency 19 G002 Base frequency voltage 19 G002 Base frequency voltage Acceleration deceleration times 20 F000 Acceleration deceleration reference frequency 20 F000 Accelera...

Page 533: ...55 M040 Frequency monitoring reference 55 M040 Frequency monitoring reference 56 M041 Current monitoring reference 56 M041 Current monitoring reference Automatic restart 57 A702 Restart coasting time 57 A702 Restart coasting time 58 A703 Restart cushion time 58 A703 Restart cushion time 59 F101 Remote function selection 59 F101 Remote function selection 60 G030 Energy saving control selection 60 G...

Page 534: ...ltage 104 G044 V F3 third frequency 104 G044 V F3 third frequency 105 G045 V F3 third frequency voltage 105 G045 V F3 third frequency voltage 106 G046 V F4 fourth frequency 106 G046 V F4 fourth frequency 107 G047 V F4 fourth frequency voltage 107 G047 V F4 fourth frequency voltage 108 G048 V F5 fifth frequency 108 G048 V F5 fifth frequency 109 G049 V F5 fifth frequency voltage 109 G049 V F5 fifth ...

Page 535: ...ash acceleration stopping time 142 F202 Backlash deceleration stopping frequency 142 F202 Backlash deceleration stopping frequency 143 F203 Backlash deceleration stopping time 143 F203 Backlash deceleration stopping time 144 M002 Speed setting switchover 144 M002 Speed setting switchover PU 145 E103 PU display language selection 145 E103 PU display language selection 147 F022 Acceleration decelera...

Page 536: ...85 T707 JOG terminal function selection 185 T707 JOG terminal function selection 186 T708 CS terminal function selection 186 T708 CS terminal function selection 187 T709 MRS terminal function selection 187 T709 MRS terminal function selection 188 T710 STOP terminal function selection 188 T710 STOP terminal function selection 189 T711 RES terminal function selection 189 T711 RES terminal function s...

Page 537: ...uit life display 256 E701 Inrush current limit circuit life display 257 E702 Control circuit capacitor life display 257 E702 Control circuit capacitor life display 258 E703 Main circuit capacitor life display 258 E703 Main circuit capacitor life display 259 E704 Main circuit capacitor life measuring 259 E704 Main circuit capacitor life measuring 260 E602 PWM frequency automatic switchover 260 E602...

Page 538: ... Password lock unlock 297 E411 Password lock unlock 298 A711 Frequency search gain 298 A711 Frequency search gain 299 A701 Rotation direction detection selection at restarting 299 A701 Rotation direction detection selection at restarting CC Link IE 313 M410 DO0 output selection 314 M411 DO1 output selection 315 M412 DO2 output selection RS 485 communication 331 N030 RS 485 communication station nu...

Page 539: ...er rotation direction 360 A511 16 bit data selection 361 A512 Position shift 362 A520 Orientation position loop gain 363 A521 Completion signal output delay time 364 A522 Encoder stop check time 365 A523 Orientation limit 366 A524 Recheck time Encoder feedback 367 G240 Speed feedback range 368 G241 Feedback gain 369 C140 Number of encoder pulses 374 H800 Overspeed detection level 374 H800 Overspee...

Page 540: ...Second motor control method selection 453 C201 Second motor capacity 453 C201 Second motor capacity 454 C202 Number of second motor poles 454 C202 Number of second motor poles 455 C225 Second motor excitation current 455 C225 Second motor excitation current 456 C204 Rated second motor voltage 456 C204 Rated second motor voltage 457 C205 Rated second motor frequency 457 C205 Rated second motor freq...

Page 541: ...eenth target position upper 4 digits 491 B047 Fourteenth target position lower 4 digits 492 B048 Fourteenth target position upper 4 digits 493 B049 Fifteenth target position lower 4 digits 494 B050 Fifteenth target position upper 4 digits Remote output 495 M500 Remote output selection 495 M500 Remote output selection 496 M501 Remote output data 1 496 M501 Remote output data 1 497 M502 Remote outpu...

Page 542: ... frequency search gain 561 H020 PTC thermistor protection level 561 H020 PTC thermistor protection level 563 M021 Energization time carrying over times 563 M021 Energization time carrying over times 564 M031 Operating time carrying over times 564 M031 Operating time carrying over times Second motor constants 569 G942 Second motor speed control gain 569 G942 Second motor speed control gain Multiple...

Page 543: ...rst free thermal reduction frequency 2 602 H003 First free thermal reduction frequency 2 603 H004 First free thermal reduction ratio 2 603 H004 First free thermal reduction ratio 2 604 H005 First free thermal reduction frequency 3 604 H005 First free thermal reduction frequency 3 606 T722 Power failure stop external signal input selection 606 T722 Power failure stop external signal input selection...

Page 544: ...e stop frequency gain 668 A786 Power failure stop frequency gain 673 G060 SF PR slip amount adjustment operation selection 673 G060 SF PR slip amount adjustment operation selection 674 G061 SF PR slip amount adjustment gain 674 G061 SF PR slip amount adjustment gain Second droop control 679 G420 Second droop gain 680 G421 Second droop filter time constant 681 G422 Second droop function activation ...

Page 545: ...n pulse width 742 C285 Second motor magnetic pole detection pulse width 743 C206 Second motor maximum frequency 743 C206 Second motor maximum frequency 744 C207 Second motor inertia integer 744 C207 Second motor inertia integer 745 C208 Second motor inertia exponent 745 C208 Second motor inertia exponent 746 C233 Second motor protection current level 746 C233 Second motor protection current level ...

Page 546: ... range torque characteristic selection 804 D400 Torque command source selection 805 D401 Torque command value RAM 806 D402 Torque command value RAM EEPROM Speed limit 807 H410 Speed limit selection 808 H411 Forward rotation speed limit speed limit 809 H412 Reverse rotation speed limit reverse side speed limit Torque limit 810 H700 Torque limit input method selection 811 D030 Set resolution switcho...

Page 547: ...ional function 849 T007 Analog input offset adjustment 849 T007 Analog input offset adjustment 850 G103 Brake operation selection 851 C240 Control terminal option Number of encoder pulses 852 C241 Control terminal option Encoder rotation direction 853 H417 Speed deviation time 854 G217 Excitation ratio 855 C248 Control terminal option Signal loss detection enable disable selection 858 T040 Termina...

Page 548: ...2 Control selection during commercial power supply operation 894 M202 Control selection during commercial power supply operation 895 M203 Power saving rate reference value 895 M203 Power saving rate reference value 896 M204 Power unit cost 896 M204 Power unit cost 897 M205 Power saving monitor average time 897 M205 Power saving monitor average time 898 M206 Power saving cumulative monitor clear 89...

Page 549: ...ent output gain current C11 931 M333 Current output gain current C38 932 T410 Terminal 4 bias command torque C38 932 T410 Terminal 4 bias command torque C39 932 T411 Terminal 4 bias torque C39 932 T411 Terminal 4 bias torque C40 933 T412 Terminal 4 gain command torque C40 933 T412 Terminal 4 gain command torque C41 933 T413 Terminal 4 gain torque C41 933 T413 Terminal 4 gain torque C42 934 A630 PI...

Page 550: ...ength 333 Stop bit length Data length n3 333 Stop bit length Data length 119 PU communication stop bit length 333 RS 485 communicationstop bit length 120 Parity check presence absence 334 Parity check presence absence n4 334 Parity check presence absence 120 PU communication parity check 334 RS 485 communication parity check selection 121 Number of communication retries 335 Number of communication...

Page 551: ...ruction Foreword This manual explains non protocol communication provided for the MELSEC F FX Series Programmable Controllers and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION This manual confers no industri...

Page 552: ...F 2 FX Series PLC User s Manual Data Communication Edition Non Protocol Communication RS RS2 Instruction ...

Page 553: ...of FX2N and FX2NC PLCs make sure that the total number of sent and received data is 8000 points or less 2 Data transfer is enabled when the connected equipment supports non protocol serial communication 3 The applicable total extension distance is 15m 49 2 maximum in accordance with RS 232C communication and 500m 1640 5 maximum in accordance with RS 485 communication 50m 164 0 when 485BD connectio...

Page 554: ...nter or bar code reader RS 232C 15 m 49 2 RS 485 500 m 1640 5 50 m 164 0 when 485BD is used Total extension distance For specifications refer to Chapter 2 Bar code reader or printer Word devices 4096 points data The amount of send data or receive data can be 4096 points maximum For details refer to Chapter 2 For wiring refer to Chapter 4 Transfer direction To check applicable PLC models refer to S...

Page 555: ...e 4096 points maximum For details refer to Chapter 2 For wiring refer to Chapter 4 For selection refer to Chapter 3 The amount of send data or receive data can be 4096 points maximum For details refer to Chapter 2 For wiring refer to Chapter 4 To check applicable PLC models refer to Section 1 3 Total extension distance For specifications refer to Chapter 2 4096 points data 4096 points data 4096 po...

Page 556: ...ar code reader Printer Word devices 4096 points data The amount of send data or receive data can be 4096 points maximum For details refer to Chapter 2 For wiring refer to Chapter 4 Transfer direction To check applicable PLC models refer to Section 1 3 Printer Communication equipment operating in accordance with RS 232C or RS 485 For selection refer to Chapter 3 For wiring refer to Chapter 4 Word d...

Page 557: ...r to Chapter 1 Programming tool Connect PLC 1 Perform PLC communication setting Refer to Chapter 5 Use RS RS2 instruction and other communication types together Refer to Chapter 10 Based on SD RD lamp lighting status and contents of error check devices verify that communication is being executed normally If there are problems refer to the troubleshooting Chapter 11 For the programming tool to PLC ...

Page 558: ...as stopped Production was stopped for some models of MELSEC F Series PLCs and programming tools described in this manual For models whose production was stopped refer to Appendix A To see the latest available products refer to the general catalog PLC Applicability applicable version Remarks FX3UC Series Full duplex communication half duplex communication FX3U Series Full duplex communication half ...

Page 559: ... PLC GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 E Ver 1 77F or later FX 30P Ver 1 30 or later GOT1000 Series display units Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable models and versions supporting the list editor function FX3S PLC GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 E Ver 1 492N or later FX 30P Ver 1 50 or later GOT1000 Series display units Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable models ...

Page 560: ...porting the list editor function FX3GC PLC GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 J Ver 1 77F or later FX 30P Ver 1 30 or later GOT1000 Series display units Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable models and versions supporting the list editor function FX3S PLC GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 J Ver 1 492N or later FX 30P Ver 1 50 or later GOT1000 Series display units Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Serie...

Page 561: ... later FX PCS WIN SW0PC FXGP WIN Ver 4 00 or later FX PCS 98 3 SW1PC FXGP 98 3 Ver 5 00 or later FX 30P Ver 1 00 or later FX 20P SET0 FX 20P MFXD Ver 5 00 or later FX 10P SET0 Ver 4 00 or later GOT F900 Series display units F940WGOT TWD F940GOT WD F940GOT BD H F940GOT BD RH F940WGOT TWD Ver 1 00 or later F940GOT LWD F940GOT SWD Ver 1 00 or later F940GOT LBD H F940GOT SBD H Ver 1 00 or later F940GO...

Page 562: ...um total extension distance FX3UC FX3U FX3GC FX3G FX3S FX2NC FX2N FX1NC FX1N FX1S FX0N PLCs 500 m 1640 5 or less when using 485ADP 50 m 164 0 or less when using 485BD 15 m 49 2 or less FX2 FX FX2C PLCs Protocol type Control procedure Non protocol communication Communication method Half duplex bidirectional communication full duplex bidirectional communication Method varies depending on FX Series B...

Page 563: ...ibed inside Not applicable 2 Communication is applicable in products manufactured in November 1994 manufacturer s serial No 4Y and later PLC Series Applicability of communication in accordance with RS 485 applicable version Applicability of communication in accordance with RS 232C applicable version FX3UC Series FX3U Series FX3GC Series FX3G Series FX3S Series FX2NC Series FX2N Series Ver 2 00 or ...

Page 564: ...points FX3U Series 0 to 4096 points FX3GC Series 0 to 4096 points FX3G Series 0 to 4096 points FX3S Series 0 to 4096 points FX2NC Series 0 to 4096 points The total number of sent and received data should be 8000 points or less FX2N Series 0 to 4096 points FX1NC Series 0 to 256 points FX1N Series 0 to 256 points FX1S Series 0 to 256 points FX0N Series 0 to 256 points FX0S Series FX0 Series FX2C Ser...

Page 565: ...rns 1 2 3 4 5 RS 232 15 m RS 232C RS 422 Converter Connect the RS 232C RS 422 converter to the standard port RS 422 built in the PLC Communication equipment operating in accordance with RS 485 or RS 232C FX PLC Important point in selection Total extension distance Communication board Communication adapter Communication Connector conversion adapter adapter Special adapter connection board This is t...

Page 566: ...B connector shape are different between units shown in FX2NC 232ADP FX0N 232ADP Select either one In the table below only the cable is different between the units shown in FX3G 485 BD FX3G 485 BD RJ Select either one Non protocol communication is not provided for the FX1 FX0 FX0S PLCs 3 2 1 For communication in accordance with RS 232C FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distan...

Page 567: ...ntenance Apx A Discontinued models FX2N 15 m 49 2 15 m 49 2 FX3S 15 m 49 2 15 m 49 2 FX3G Standard built in port RS 422 8 pin MINI DIN When using channel 0 ch 0 15 m 49 2 FX3G 14 point 24 point type When using channel 1 ch 1 15 m 49 2 15 m 49 2 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX2N 232 BD 9 pin D Sub male FX2NC 232ADP 9 pin D Sub male FX0N 232ADP 25 pin D Sub...

Page 568: ...m 49 2 15 m 49 2 When using channel 2 ch 2 The communication equipment works as ch2 when connected to the option connector 2 15 m 49 2 Ch2 is not available when the FX3G 8AV BD FX3G 4EX BD or FX3G 2EYT BD is connected to the option connector 2 15 m 49 2 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check ch1 FX3G 232 BD 9 pin D Sub male ch1 FX3U 232ADP MB 9 pin D Sub male FX3G ...

Page 569: ...2 When using channel 2 ch 2 When a FX3U 8AV BD is used it occupies one communication port channel 15 m 49 2 When a FX3U CF ADP is used it occupies one communication port channel 15 m 49 2 FX1NC 15 m 49 2 FX2NC 15 m 49 2 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX3U 232 BD 9 pin D Sub male RD S D ch1 FX3U CNV BD FX3U 232ADP MB 9 pin D Sub male ch1 FX3U 232ADP MB 9 pin...

Page 570: ...n using channel 2 ch 2 15 m 49 2 FX3UC D DS DSS When using channel 1 ch 1 15 m 49 2 When using channel 2 ch 2 When a FX3U CF ADP is used it occupies one communication port channel 15 m 49 2 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX 232AW FX 232AWC FX 232AWC H FX3U 232ADP MB 9 pin D Sub male ch1 ch1 FX3U 232ADP MB 9 pin D Sub male ch2 FX3U ADP MB Where represents 23...

Page 571: ...ing channel 1 ch 1 15 m 49 2 15 m 49 2 When using channel 2 ch 2 When a FX3U 8AV BD is used it occupies one communication port channel 15 m 49 2 When a FX3U CF ADP is used it occupies one communication port channel 15 m 49 2 FX2 FX 15 m 49 2 FX2C 15 m 49 2 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX3U 232 BD 9 pin D Sub male RD S D ch1 FX3U CNV BD FX3U 232ADP MB 9 pi...

Page 572: ...FX0N 500 m 1640 5 FX1S 50 m 164 0 500 m 1640 5 FX1N 50 m 164 0 500 m 1640 5 FX2N 50 m 164 0 500 m 1640 5 FX2NC 485ADP European terminal block FX0N 485ADP Terminal block FX1N 485 BD European terminal block FX1N CNV BD FX2NC 485ADP European terminal block FX0N 485ADP Terminal block FX1N CNV BD FX1N 485 BD European terminal block FX1N CNV BD FX2NC 485ADP European terminal block FX0N 485ADP Terminal b...

Page 573: ...00 m 1640 5 FX3G 14 point 24 point type 50 m 164 0 500 m 1640 5 FX3G 40 point 60 point type When using channel 1 ch 1 The communication equipment works as ch1 when connected to the option connector 1 50 m 164 0 500 m 1640 5 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX3G 485 BD European terminal block FX3G 485 BD RJ RJ45 connector FX3S CNV ADP FX3U 485ADP MB European t...

Page 574: ... is not available when the FX3G 8AV BD FX3G 4EX BD or FX3G 2EYT BD is connected to the option connector 2 500 m 1640 5 FX3U When using channel 1 ch 1 50 m 164 0 500 m 1640 5 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check ch2 ch2 FX3G 485 BD European terminal block FX3G 485 BD RJ RJ45 connector FX3U ADP MB Where represents 232 and 485 ch1 ch2 FX3G CNV ADP FX3U 485ADP MB Eur...

Page 575: ...m 1640 5 When a FX3U CF ADP is used it occupies one communication port channel 500 m 1640 5 FX1NC 500 m 1640 5 FX2NC 500 m 1640 5 FX3GC When using channel 1 ch 1 500 m 1640 5 When using channel 2 ch 2 500 m 1640 5 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX3U 485ADP MB European terminal block ch2 FX3U BD Where represents 232 422 485 USB and 8AV ch1 R D S D FX3U 232AD...

Page 576: ...ed it occupies one communication port channel 500 m 1640 5 When a FX3U CF ADP is used it occupies one communication port channel 500 m 1640 5 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX3U 485ADP MB European terminal block ch1 FX3U 232ADP MB FX3U 485ADP MB FX3U CF ADP ch1 FX3U 485ADP MB European terminal block ch2 ch1 FX3U 485 BD European terminal block RD RD A RD B S...

Page 577: ...undle the main circuit line together with or lay it close to the main circuit high voltage line or load line Otherwise noise disturbance and or surge induction are likely to take place As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or high voltage lines 2 Ground the shield wire or shield of the shielded cable at one point on the PLC However do not use co...

Page 578: ...r refer to Section 4 3 Standard built in port RS 422 16 5m 54 1 maximum Manufacturer Model name Remarks Mitsubishi Cable Industries Ltd SPEV SB 0 2 2P Two pair cable of 0 2 mm2 SPEV SB MPC 0 2 3P Three pair cable of 0 2 mm2 SPEV SB 0 5 2P Two pair cable of 0 5 mm2 Showa Holdings Co Ltd KMPEV SB CWS 178 0 2SQ 2P Two pair cable of 0 2 mm2 KMPEV SB CWS 178 0 5SQ 2P Two pair cable of 0 5 mm2 Sumitomo ...

Page 579: ... Maintenance Apx A Discontinued models 4 2 3 10BASE T cable 10BASE T cables used in LAN wiring for a personal computer can be connected to FX3G 485 BD RJ 1 Selection procedure when purchasing 1 Cable type 10BASE T cable Category 3 or higher 2 Connection specifications Straight type 3 Connector RJ45 connector Connector with metal frame is used 2 Cautions on using commercial cables Pay attention to ...

Page 580: ...he end of the cable When using a bar terminal with an insulating sleeve Because it is difficult to insert a cable into an insulating sleeve depending on the thickness of the cable sheath select the proper cable according to the outline drawing Reference 1 Old model name CRIMPFOX ZA 3 2 Old model name CRIMPFOX UD 6 Cable size when one cable is connected Cable size when two cables are connected Bar ...

Page 581: ...diameter approximately 25mm 0 98 Reference FX3U 485 BD FX3G 485 BD FX3U 485ADP MB FX3G 485 BD RJ FX2N 485 BD FX1N 485 BD FX2NC 485ADP 2 Terminal block In the FX0N 485ADP and FX 485ADP the terminal screw size is M3 Make sure to use a crimp style terminal with the following sizes Make sure that the tightening torque is 0 5 to 0 8 N m Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above men...

Page 582: ...X3G 485 BD RJ and FX3U 485ADP MB have built in terminal resistors Set the terminal resistor selector switch accordingly FX3U 485 BD FX3U 485ADP MB FX3G 485 BD Remove the upper terminal block before changing over the switch in the FX3G 485 BD Removal Loosen the terminal block mounting screws and remove the terminal block Installation Attach the terminal block and tighten the terminal block mounting...

Page 583: ... in FX2N FX2NC FX3S FX3G except ch0 FX3GC except ch0 FX3U and FX3UC PLCs uses the control line wiring is required for this signal 2 Only the FX0N 232ADP and FX 232ADP uses the ER DTR and DR DSR signals FX 232ADP FX0N 232ADP FX 232AW FX 232AWC FX 232AWC H FX1N 232 BD FX2N 232 BD FX2NC 232ADP FX3U 232 BD FX3G 232 BD FX3U 232ADP MB Signal name Function 25 pin D Sub female connector 25 pin D Sub femal...

Page 584: ...R signals FG 1 FG 1 FG 1 CD DCD 1 8 CD DCD 1 8 CD DCD 1 8 RD RXD 2 3 RD RXD 2 3 RD RXD 2 3 SD TXD 3 2 SD TXD 3 2 SD TXD 3 2 ER DTR 4 20 RS RTS 7 4 ER DTR 4 20 SG GND 5 7 SG GND 5 7 SG GND 5 7 DR DSR 6 6 CS CTS 8 5 DR DSR 6 6 PLC External equipment operating in accordance with RS 232C Name FX2N 232 BD FX1N 232 BD FX0N 232ADP FX 232AW FX 232AWC FX 232AWC H FX 232ADP Name CS RS Name DR ER 9 pin D Sub...

Page 585: ...l to the grounding terminal in the PLC requiring Class D grounding 3 If the grounding terminal is not provided in the PLC perform Class D grounding directly 4 Make sure to provide a terminal resistor at the end of each line The FX3U 485 BD and FX3U 485ADP MB have a built in terminal resistor Set the terminal resistor selector switch accordingly The FX3G 485 BD FX0N 485ADP FX2NC 485ADP FX2N 485 BD ...

Page 586: ...ibutor BMJ 8 BMJ 8 28N No internal connection of the No 2 and 8 pin Do not use a plug with terminal resistor HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO LTD FX3G 485 BD RJ Distributor BMJ 8 Terminal resistor selector switch Open Class D grounding Class D grounding Class D grounding 1 Class D grounding 1 Terminal resistor 110Ω SDA TXD Communication equipment operating in accordance with RS 485 SDB TXD RDA RXD RDB RXD LINK...

Page 587: ...Class D grounding If the grounding terminal is not provided in the PLC perform Class D grounding directly 3 Make sure to provide a terminal resistor at the end of each line The FX3G 485 BD FX3U 485 BD and FX3U 485ADP MB have a built in terminal resistor Set the terminal resistor selector switch accordingly The FX0N 485ADP FX2NC 485ADP FX2N 485 BD and FX1N 485 BD are supplied together with terminal...

Page 588: ...MJ 8 28N No internal connection of the No 2 and 8 pin Do not use a plug with terminal resistor HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO LTD RDA RDB SDA SDB SG RDA RDB SDA SDB SG FX3G 485 BD RJ Distributor BMJ 8 Terminal resistor selector switch Open Class D grounding Class D grounding Class D grounding 1 Class D grounding 1 Terminal resistor 330Ω 2 SDA TXD Communication equipment operating in accordance with RS 485 RS...

Page 589: ...ng circuit switch to 1 pair 2 pair 4 4 Grounding Grounding should be performed as stated below The grounding resistance should be 100 or less Independent grounding should be performed for best results When independent grounding can not be performed perform shared grounding as shown in the following figure For details refer to the Hardware Edition of each series The grounding wire size should be AW...

Page 590: ...selected method shown above If both methods are selected priority is given to the method using parameters 2 Communication setting method applicability in each FX Series 3 Setting data flow FX Series Specification using parameters Specification by writing settings data to special data registers FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC FX3S FX3G ch1 ch2 FX3GC ch1 ch2 FX3U FX3UC Recommended FX2 FX FX2C FX0N FX3G c...

Page 591: ...8400 D8420 or D8370 After that set the PLC mode to STOP once and then set it to RUN again Or turn OFF the PLC power once and then turn it ON again As soon as the PLC mode is set to RUN from STOP or the PLC power is turned ON from OFF the settings become valid In FX3S FX3G FX3GC PLC after writing the preset data turn the power ON from OFF set the PLC mode to RUN from STOP and the settings become va...

Page 592: ...ick the PLC System 2 tab in the dialog box 3 Setting the serial communication parameters Select a channel and check the Operate Communication Setting box then adjust the parameters for that channel Execute the setting according to the connected communication equipment Click End Caution When setting H W Type to RS485 check the Control Line box 4 Writing parameters to the PLC Select Online Write to ...

Page 593: ...nd FX 30P handy programming panel It is not possible to set ch0 in FX3G and FX3GC PLCs using parameters This section describes how to change parameters with FXGP WIN Ch0 ch2 cannot be set using FXGP WIN For details on GX Works2 operating procedure refer to section 5 2 For details on GX Developer operating procedure refer to GX Developer Operating Manual For details on FX 30P operating procedure re...

Page 594: ...hod FXGP WIN 2 When there are already parameter settings The existing communication setting contents are displayed 2 Adjusting serial setting parameter Execute the settings according to the connected communication equipment Caution When setting Hardware to RS 485 set Control line to H W mode 3 Writing a sequence program parameters to the PLC Select PLC Transfers Write from the toolbar and click OK...

Page 595: ...ait flag This device remains ON while the PLC is waiting to send R M8122 Sending request When this device is set to ON the PLC starts to send R W M8123 Receiving complete flag This device turns ON when receiving is completed While this device receiving complete flag is ON the PLC cannot receive any data R W M8124 Carrier detection flag This device turns ON in synchronization with the CD signal R M...

Page 596: ...or When terminator provided is selected in the communication format settings the lowest order byte of D8125 is used When data is sent the lowest order byte of D8125 is added at the end of the specified send data When data is received receiving is completed 1 when the data on lowest order byte of D8125 is received 1 Receiving is completed also when the amount of received data specified by the RS in...

Page 597: ...M8123 Receiving complete Sending request Receiving complete When the command contact M0 is set to ON the PLC waits to send and receive For handling of sent and received data refer to Subsection 6 2 3 When the sending command M1 is set to ON write the send data to D100 and so on as many devices as specified number Give the sending command of the pulse operation type After writing the send data set ...

Page 598: ...it data 16 bit data is divided into lowest order 8 bit and highest order 8 bit when it is sent or received D200 highest order byte STX D200 lowest order byte D201 lowest order byte D201 highest order byte ETX STX D500 lowest order byte D500 highest order byte D501 lowest order byte D501 highest order byte D502 lowest order byte D502 highest order byte ETX Terminator They cannot exceed the upper li...

Page 599: ...y the lowest order 8 bits are regarded as valid data M8000 M8161 STX D200 lowest order byte D201 lowest order byte D202 lowest order byte D203 lowest order byte ETX STX D500 lowest order byte D501 lowest order byte D502 lowest order byte D503 lowest order byte D504 lowest order byte D505 lowest order byte ETX Terminator They cannot exceed the upper limit number of devices bytes to be received spec...

Page 600: ...rrect data will not be sent 6 2 5 Operation when data is received When RS instruction is executed the PLC waits to receive When the PLC receives data from the connected equipment and receiving is completed the receiving complete flag M8123 is set to ON When the PLC receives data it stores the received data to the data registers to n 1 specified by the RS instruction While the receiving complete fl...

Page 601: ... DTR turns OFF When the control line ER DTR turns OFF the external equipment should suspend data sending After the control line ER DTR turns OFF the PLC can receive up to 30 characters bytes 2 When the external equipment suspends data sending the PLC sets the time out check flag M8129 and receiving complete flag M8123 to ON after the time out time setting D8129 Move the received data in a sequence...

Page 602: ...tarts to send 1 When the control line is not provided 1 Set it to 2 scan times or more in FX2 FX FX2C FX0N FX1S FX1N and FX1NC PLCs 2 When the control line is in the standard mode Use this mode when only sending or receiving 1 When only sending is executed Reset it in a sequence program While it remains ON the PLC cannot receive the next set of data Message 1 RS instruction driving Sending wait fl...

Page 603: ...s not used 3 When the control line is in the modem mode 1 Set it to 2 scan times or more in FX2 FX FX2C FX0N FX1S FX1N and FX1NC PLCs Reset it in a sequence program While it remains ON the PLC cannot receive the next set of data OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON RS instruction driving RD RXD Receive data ER DTR ON Receiving complete M8123 Message 1 Message 2 Reset it in a sequence program While it remains ON t...

Page 604: ... flag M8121 remains ON while the DR DSR is OFF the PLC waits to send and the control line is in the standard mode or interlink mode 1 Without control line 2 When the control line is in the standard mode Use this mode when only sending or receiving The control line and transfer sequence are equivalent to those in FX2N PLCs before Ver 2 00 Refer to Subsection 6 3 1 3 When the control line is in the ...

Page 605: ...nt of data already received becomes Number of bytes to be received 30 and asks the external equipment to stop sending After that the PLC can only receive up to 30 characters In this case temporarily stop sending and then send the remaining data after the ER DTR signal turns ON again When sending is stopped the PLC finishes receiving after the time out time setting is reached When sending is not st...

Page 606: ...truction to OFF set D8120 to 0 and then set a new value to D8120 4 In the interlink mode set the amount of received data n to 31 or more If it is set to 30 or less the control line ER DTR is set to OFF as soon as the PLC receives data As a result the received data may be partially skipped 5 Do not use another instruction which uses the same communication port If such an instruction is used communi...

Page 607: ... 1 Example of Printing Using RS Instruction Using RS 232C Connection In this example a printer with an RS 232C interface is connected to a PLC and data sent from the PLC is printed 1 System configuration Use a communication cable suitable to the pin arrangement of the printer connector For representative wiring refer to Chapter 4 2 Communication format Align the communication format in the PLC wit...

Page 608: ...Send data is written This step is not required when the communication parameters are already set M8000 M8120 The communication setting is kept This step is required only in an FX0N PLC 0000 0000 0110 1111 0 0 6 F b15 b0 Power is turned ON RS instruction is driven Data is sent Turn ON the power to the PLC and printer set the PLC to RUN mode and set the printer to online mode At this time the commun...

Page 609: ...RS2 instruction Available channels vary depending on the main unit For details refer to Section 3 2 1 Bit devices R Read only W Write only R W Read or Write 1 FX3U FX3UC PLCs Ver 2 30 or later and FX3S FX3G FX3GC PLCs is applicable Device Name Description R W ch0 ch1 ch2 M8062 M8063 M8438 Serial communication error This device turns ON when a communication error occurs When this device serial comm...

Page 610: ... stores the amount of data already received R D8405 D8425 Communication parameter display This devices stores communication parameters set in the PLC R D8379 D8409 D8429 Time out time setting This device sets the timeout time R W D8380 D8410 D8430 Header 1 and header 2 These devices set the headers 1 to 4 When H00 is set to the header 1 headers are not provided The area before H00 in 1 byte units ...

Page 611: ... R W D8383 D8413 D8433 Terminator 3 and terminator 4 R W D8384 D8414 D8434 Receiving sum receive data This device stores the received sum check value R D8385 D8415 D8435 Receiving sum calculation result This device stores the sum check value calculated from the received data R D8386 D8416 D8436 Sending sum This device stores the sum check value added to the send data R D8389 D8419 D8439 Operation ...

Page 612: ... 1 Applicable devices Only available for FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC PLCs m n 0 to 4096 points n1 K0 K1 or K2 2 Program example Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P m n n1 S D M0 FNC 87 RS2 D100 D0 D200 D1 S D m n Head ...

Page 613: ...set in the devices above is added at the head of the specified send data When data is received receiving begins when the data set in the devices above is received continuously Even if header provided is selected headers are not provided if header 1 is set to 00H The area before 00H in 1 byte units is used to set the headers Caution Set the header before driving the RS2 instruction Do not change th...

Page 614: ...t time setting device D8379 D8409 or D8429 3 Sum check When sum check provided is selected in the communication format setting the sum check is executed for the sent and received data When selecting sum check provided make sure to select terminator provided When data is sent the sum of data terminator is calculated and added to the send data When data is received it is checked whether or not the r...

Page 615: ...eceiving complete FNC 87 RS2 D100 D0 D200 K30 K1 When the command contact M0 is set to ON the PLC waits for sending and receiving For handling of sent and received data refer to Subsection 8 2 3 When the sending command M1 is set to ON write the send data to D100 and later as many devices as the specified amount Give the sending command of the pulse operation type After writing the send data set t...

Page 616: ...d DLE STX D8410 0210H D8411 0000H Terminators provided DLE ETX D8412 0310H D8413 0000H Sum check provided CR LF added It is automatically reset when sending is completed D8412 CR LF 44H highest order byte 44H Sum lowest order byte Send data DLE D8410 lowest order byte STX D8410 highest order byte 31H D100 lowest order byte 32H D100 highest order byte 33H D101 lowest order byte 34H D101 highest ord...

Page 617: ...2 CR LF 45H highest order byte 44H lowest order byte Header Data area Terminator Receive data 4 3 2 1 0 DLE D8410 lowest order byte STX D8410 highest order byte 35H D200 lowest order byte 36H D200 highest order byte 37H D201 lowest order byte 38H D201 highest order byte DLE D202 lowest order byte ETX highest order byte 00H 35H 6BH A2H DAH EDH It is set when receiving is completed M8403 Receiving c...

Page 618: ... While the sending request flag is ON do not change the amount of send data or the contents of the send data 2 Do not set the sending request flag to OFF in a sequence program If the send data is changed while the sending request flag is ON or if the sending request flag is set to OFF in a sequence program correct data is not sent 8 2 5 Operation when data is received When RS2 instruction is execu...

Page 619: ...es not turn OFF automatically Set it to OFF in the sequence program When the receiving complete flag is set to OFF the time out check flag is also set to OFF By using this function the PLC can receive data from equipment where the amount of send data varies without the terminator 4 When the control line is set to the interlink mode When the interlink mode is selected in the communication format th...

Page 620: ...the receiving complete flag is set to OFF the PLC waits to receive 2 If the RS2 instruction is driven while the amount of received data n is 0 the receiving complete flag M8373 M8403 M8423 turns ON To make the PLC wait to receive set the amount of received data n to 1 or more and set the receiving complete flag M8373 M8403 M8423 to OFF from ON 3 Set the amount of received data to a value including...

Page 621: ...t provided Headers provided DLE STX D8410 0210H D8411 0000H Terminators provided DLE ETX D8412 0310H D8413 0000H In the case of send data In the case of receive data Sum check code target D100 lowest order bits 31H D100 highest order byte 32H D101 lowest order byte 33H D101 highest order byte 34H D8412 lowest order byte 10H DLE D8412 highest order byte 03H ETX DDH Converted into ASCII codes Send d...

Page 622: ...ay not be able to receive data and the sent and received data may be destroyed In full duplex bidirectional communication the sending wait flag M8371 M8401 and M8421 does not turn ON However the sending wait flag M8371 M8401 and M8421 remains ON while the DR DSR is OFF the PLC waits to send and the control line is in the standard mode or interlink mode 1 When the control line is not provided Reset...

Page 623: ...When only receiving is executed The DR DSR signal is not used 3 When the control line is in the modem mode OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON Message 1 Message 1 Message 2 RS2 instruction driving SD TXD Send data Sending request M8402 ER DTR DR DSR Reset it in a sequence program While it remains ON the PLC cannot receive the next set of data OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON Message 1 Message 2 RS2 instruction dri...

Page 624: ... PLC can only receive up to 30 characters In this case temporarily stop sending and then send the remaining data after the ER DTR signal turns ON again When sending is stopped the PLC finishes receiving after the time out time setting is reached When sending is not stopped the PLC finishes receiving after it has received the final send data or 30 characters Accordingly make sure that the number of...

Page 625: ...eived data n to 31 or more If it is set to 30 or less the control line ER DTR is set to OFF as soon as the PLC receives data 5 FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC PLCs execute full duplex bidirectional communication When using half duplex bidirectional communication pay attention not to turn ON the sending request flag while receiving 6 When using the header and terminator set them before driving the R...

Page 626: ...nected to a PLC and the data sent from the PLC is printed 1 System configuration Use a communication cable suitable to the pin arrangement of the connector of the printer used Communication format Align the communication format in the PLC with that in the printer used The table below shows the communication format in the main unit Data length 8 bit Parity Even Stop bit 2 bit Baud rate 2400 bps Hea...

Page 627: ... D10 K1 M0 MOV H6574 D10 MOV H7473 D11 MOV H6C20 D12 MOV H6E69 D13 MOV H0D65 D14 MOV H000A D15 The communication format is set RS2 instruction is driven This step is not required when the communication parameters are already set 0000 0000 0110 1111 0 0 6 F b15 b0 Sending request is given Power is turned ON RS2 instruction is driven Data is sent Turn ON the power to the PLC and printer set the PLC ...

Page 628: ...ing on the main unit For details refer to Section 3 2 For the communication setting method refer to Section 10 6 For details on the operation mode display refer to Subsection 11 4 1 Device Name Description D8120 Communication format setting Sets the communication format D8419 Operation mode display in FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC Allows the communication type being executed to be checked Device ...

Page 629: ...the programming communication is selected the PLC sends back NAK 1 When changing over using RUN mode and STOP mode Set the communication format to one of the settings shown below to use non protocol communication in accordance with RS 232C using the RS instruction while in RUN mode and then use the programming communication while in STOP mode 2 When changing over using the RS instruction while in ...

Page 630: ...et the communication format as shown below to use non protocol communication in accordance with RS 232C using RS instruction while in RUN mode and then use the programming communication while in STOP mode Make sure to set the communication format used in the RS instruction to D8120 and write it before executing the RS instruction 2 When changing over using the RS instruction while in RUN mode When...

Page 631: ...d in the operation mode display device D8149 1 When changing over using RUN mode and STOP mode Set the communication format as shown below to use non protocol communication in accordance with RS 232C or RS 485 using the RS instruction while in RUN mode and then use computer link while in STOP mode Set computer link using parameters Make sure to set the communication format used in the RS instructi...

Page 632: ...ow to use non protocol communication in accordance with RS 232C using the RS2 instruction while in RUN mode and then use the programming communication while in STOP mode Make sure to set the communication format used in the RS2 instruction to D8370 D8400 or D8420 and write it before executing the RS2 instruction 2 When changing over using the RS2 instruction while in RUN mode When changing over no...

Page 633: ... non protocol communication in accordance with RS 232C using RS2 instruction while in RUN mode and then use a protocol for computer link while in STOP mode Set computer link using parameters Make sure to set the communication format used in the RS2 instruction to D8370 D8400 or D8420 and write it before executing the RS2 instruction Non protocol communication in accordance with RS 485 cannot be ch...

Page 634: ...1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC PLCs are applicable 3 Make sure to set as 0 when using non protocol communication Bit No Name Contents 0 bit OFF 1 bit ON b0 Data length 7 bit 8 bit b1 b2 Parity b2 b1 0 0 Not provided 0 1 Odd 1 1 Even b3 Stop bit 1 bit 2 bit b4 b5 b6 b7 Baud rate bps b7 b6 b5 b4 b7 b6 b5 b4 0 0 1 1 300 0 1 1 1 4800 0 1 0 0 600 1 0 0 0 9600 0 1 0 1 1200 1 0 0...

Page 635: ...rter Communication F Non Protocol Communication RS RS2 Instruction G Non Protocol Communication FX 2N 232IF H Programming Communication I Remote Maintenance Apx A Discontinued models To set the communication type use the following program Data length 7 bit Parity Even Stop bit 1 bit Baud rate 9600 bps Protocol Non protocol Header Not provided Terminator Not provided Control line Modem mode M8002 F...

Page 636: ...sure to set the terminators when adding the sum check code To set the communication type use the following program Bit No Name Contents 0 bit OFF 1 bit ON b0 Data length 7 bit 8 bit b1 b2 Parity b2 b1 0 0 Not provided 0 1 Odd 1 1 Even b3 Stop bit 1 bit 2 bit b4 b5 b6 b7 Baud rate bps b7 b6 b5 b4 b7 b6 b5 b4 0 0 1 1 300 0 1 1 1 4800 0 1 0 0 600 1 0 0 0 9600 0 1 0 1 1200 1 0 0 1 19200 0 1 1 0 2400 1...

Page 637: ...ommunication Status Based on LED Indication Check the status of the RD and SD indicator LEDs provided in the optional equipment 11 3 Checking Installation 1 Mounting status If the communication equipment is not securely connected to the PLC communication is not possible For mounting method refer to the respective communication equipment manual 2 Power supply for FX0N 485ADP The FX0N 485ADP require...

Page 638: ... these instructions are used in the program the communication function is not available in ch2 Use ch1 or delete these instructions After deleting these instructions turn OFF the PLC power and then turn the power ON again 3 In FX3U and FX3UC PLCs Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program If these instructions are used in the program the communication function is not av...

Page 639: ... FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch1 M8063 turns ON When communication port ch2 is used in FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC PLCs M8438 turns ON When the serial communication error flag turns ON D8062 D8063 or D8438 stores the corresponding error code Available channels vary depending on the main unit For details refer to Section 3 2 2 Checking the error code When the serial communi...

Page 640: ...ction flag This device turns ON and OFF in synchronization with the CD signal R M8129 1 Time out check flag This device turns ON when data receiving is suspended and the next set of receive data is not given within the time set by the time out time setting device D8129 R W M8161 8 bit processing mode This device sets the send receive data to 16 bit data or 8 bit data W Device Name Description R W ...

Page 641: ...ept 2 Cautions on use In FX0N PLCs the communication setting status is kept only when M8120 is set to ON In any PLC other than the FX0N PLCs setting of M8120 is not required 12 2 3 Sending wait flag M8121 This device remains ON while the PLC is waiting to send 1 Detailed contents In full duplex communication in FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC PLCs While the control line is set to the standard or in...

Page 642: ...o receive In such a case set the amount of received data to 1 or more set the receiving complete flag to ON and then set it to OFF 12 2 6 Carrier detection flag M8124 This device turns ON and OFF in synchronization with the CD DCD signal 1 Detailed contents The CD DCD signal channel receiving carrier detection turns ON when the modem line is established While the carrier detection flag is OFF the ...

Page 643: ... below 2 Cautions on use Serial communication error code are not cleared even when communication is restored Serial communication errors are cleared in FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC PLCs when the power is turned off and on Serial communication errors are cleared in other PLCs when the mode is switched from STOP to RUN Error code Contents of error 6301 Parity error overrun error or framing error 6...

Page 644: ...ce M8120 to ON 12 2 10 Remaining amount of data to be sent D8122 This device stores the amount of remaining send data 1 Detailed contents This device stores the amount of remaining send data in 8 bit 1 byte units Only data in communication frames are regarded as targets of counting Bit No Name Contents 0 bit OFF 1 bit ON b0 Data length 7 bit 8 bit b1 b2 Parity b2 b1 0 0 Not provided 0 1 Odd 1 1 Ev...

Page 645: ...ion format setting the lowest order byte of D8125 is used When data is sent the lowest order byte of D8125 is added at the end of the specified send data When data is received receiving is completed when the data in the lowest order byte of D8125 is received 12 2 14 Time out time setting time D8129 This device sets the time out time setting 1 Detailed contents This device sets the error evaluation...

Page 646: ...ter instruction 8 Variable analog potentiometer expansion board is used 9 MODBUS communication 10 CF ADP 11 ENET ADP 12 Input output expansion board is used Device Name Description R W ch0 ch1 ch2 M8062 M8063 M8438 Serial communication error This device turns ON when a communication error occurs When this device serial communication error turns ON D8062 D8063 or D8438 stores the corresponding erro...

Page 647: ...ors are not cleared even when communication is restored Cleared when the power is turned off and on Device Name Description R W ch0 ch1 ch2 D8062 D8063 D8438 Serial communicationerror code When the serial communication error flag turns ON this device stores the corresponding error code R D8370 D8400 D8420 Communication format setting This device sets the communication format R W D8372 D8402 D8422 ...

Page 648: ...s are automatically set to OFF When communication port ch0 is used M8372 is set When communication port ch1 is used M8402 is set When communication port ch2 is used M8422 is set 2 Cautions on use When setting these devices to ON set the drive condition in the pulse type 12 4 4 Receiving complete flag M8373 M8403 and M8423 These devices turn ON when receiving is completed 1 Detailed contents These ...

Page 649: ...with the DR DSR signal 1 Detailed contents The state of DR DSR signal can be checked when executing RS2 instruction When communicating port ch1 is used M8405 turns ON OFF When communication port ch2 is used M8425 turns ON OFF The images of M8405 and M8425 are updated during END processing 12 4 7 Time out check flag M8379 M8409 and M8429 These devices turn ON when data receiving is suspended and th...

Page 650: ... Serial communication error codes are not cleared even when communication is restored Cleared when the power is turned off and on Error code Contents of error ch0 D8062 ch1 D8063 ch2 D8438 6201 6301 3801 Parity error overrun error or framing error 6202 6302 3802 Incorrect communication character 6203 6303 3803 Communication data sum mismatch 6204 6304 3804 Incorrect data format 6205 6305 3805 Inco...

Page 651: ...fter the terminators Make sure to set the terminators when adding the sum check 5 Make sure to set as 0 when using non protocol communication 2 Cautions on use In FX3S FX3U and FX3UC PLCs the communication format can be set using parameters Even if the communication format is changed while the RS2 instruction is being driven it is not reflected In FX3G and FX3GC PLCs the communication format can b...

Page 652: ...stores the value 12 4 12 Communication parameter display D8405 and D8425 These devices store the communication parameters set in the PLC 1 Detailed contents When the PLC power is turned ON these devices store the contents of the communication parameters The setting contents are the same as those of the communication format setting device When communication port ch1 is used D8405 stores the content...

Page 653: ... 4 1 Detailed contents When terminator provided is selected in the communication format setting the terminators are set in the sent and received data Up to four terminators can be set in each channel When communication port ch0 is used D8382 and D8383 set the terminators When communication port ch1 is used D8412 and D8413 set the terminators When communication port ch2 is used D8432 and D8433 set ...

Page 654: ...Detailed contents When sum check provided is selected in the communication format settings the sum check is executed for the sent and received data These devices store the sum calculated by the FX PLC from the data received sent from the external equipment When communication port ch0 is used D8385 stores the receiving sum When communication port ch1 is used D8415 stores the receiving sum When comm...

Page 655: ...type currently being used in the communication port When communication port ch0 is used D8389 stores the communication type When communication port ch1 is used D8419 stores the communication type When communication port ch2 is used D8439 stores the communication type The table below shows the contents of the communication type codes 2 Cautions on use These devices store 5 while RS2 instruction is ...

Page 656: ...on Protocol Communication RS RS2 Instruction 12 Related Data 12 5 ASCII Code Table 12 5 ASCII Code Table ASCII code table 8 bit code expressed in hexadecimal The ASCII codes A1H to DFH indicate Japanese characters 1 ASCII CODE 5C symbol is displayed as in Japanese ...

Page 657: ...is manual explains non protocol communication provided for the MELSEC F FX Series Programmable Controllers using the FX2N 232IF and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION This manual confers no indust...

Page 658: ...G 2 FX Series PLC User s Manual Data Communication Edition Non Protocol Communication FX2N 232IF ...

Page 659: ...Up to seven blocks can be connected to the FX3UC 32MT LT 2 PLC 2 For FX2NC PLCs Up to four blocks can be connected to one PLC 2 Non protocol communication Communication is executed in the full duplex asynchronous system non protocol method The communication format can be specified using the buffer memory BFM The FROM and TO instructions are applicable for the buffer memory In FX3U and FX3UC PLCs o...

Page 660: ...l program examples System configuration Refer to Chapter 3 Wiring procedure Wiring example Based on SD RD lamp lighting status and contents of error check devices verify that communication is being executed normally If there are problems refer to the troubleshooting Chapter 7 Refer to Chapter 6 Outline of system Available PLC versions Available programming tools Outline Refer to Chapter 1 Programm...

Page 661: ...ide Not applicable 1 3 2 Products whose production was stopped Production was stopped for some models of MELSEC F Series PLCs and programming tools described in this manual For models whose production was stopped refer to Appendix A To see the latest available products refer to the general catalog PLC Applicability Remarks FX3UC Series FX3U Series FX3GC Series 232IF is not connectable FX3G Series ...

Page 662: ...display units for applicable models and versions supporting the list editor function FX2N and FX2NC PLCs GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 E Ver 1 08J or later GX Developer SW D5C F GPPW E SW2 A or later FX PCS WIN E SW0PC FXGP WIN E Ver 1 00 or later FX 30P Ver 1 00 or later FX 20P E SET0 FX 20P MFXC E Ver 3 00 or later FX 10P E Ver 3 00 or later GOT F900 Series display units F940WGOT TWD E F940GOT WD E F940...

Page 663: ...s Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable models and versions supporting the list editor function FX2N and FX2NC PLCs GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 J Ver 1 07H or later GX Developer SW D5C F GPPW J SW2 A or later FX PCS WIN SW0PC FXGP WIN Ver 2 00 or later FX PCS KIT 98 SW1PC FXGP 98 3 5 Ver 4 00 or later FX PCS 98 3 SW1PC FXGP 98 3 Ver 4 00 or later FX PCS KIT V 3 SW1PC FXGP V3 Ve...

Page 664: ...he table below Item Specifications Remarks Transmission standard RS 232C standard Maximum total extension distance 15 m 49 2 Protocol type Non protocol communication Communication method Full duplex asynchronous system Baud rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 bps Character format Start bit Data bit 7 bit 8 bit Parity bit None odd or even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bit Header Provided or not provided Up t...

Page 665: ...pacity of the 5V DC power supplied from the PLC is limited The current consumption at 5V DC of the 232IF is 40 mA Make sure that total current consumption at 5V DC including other blocks does not exceed the specified value FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX2N 15 m 49 2 FX2NC 15 m 49 2 and indicate the communication equipment combination patterns 1 2 FX PLC F...

Page 666: ...r is assigned in the order No 1 No 2 No 3 Up to eight 232IF units can be connected to an FX2N FX3U FX3UC 1 PLC up to four 232IF units can be connected to an FX2NC PLC 1 Up to seven 232IF units can be connected to an FX3UC 32MT LT 2 PLC 1 For FX2N PLC FX3U 15 m 49 2 FX3UC 15 m 49 2 15 m 49 2 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX2N 232IF 9 pin D Sub male PO W E R...

Page 667: ...3U 48MR ES X000 to X027 Y000 to Y027 FX2N 16EX X030 to X047 FX2N 232IF Special block No 1 PO W E R S D R D PO W E R S D R D FX2NC CNV IF Connector conversion interface FX2N 232IF Special block No 1 FX2N 16EX X010 to X027 FX2NC 16MT X000 to X007 Y000 to Y007 FX2N 232IF Special block No 0 PO W E R S D R D PO W E R S D R D FX2NC CNV IF Connector conversion interface FX2N 232IF Special block No 0 FX2N...

Page 668: ...fications without Control Line BFM 0 communication format b9 0 b8 0 control line not provided Pin No Signal name Function Signal direction 232IF External equipment 1 CD DCD Carrier detection 2 RD RXD Receive data with LED indicator 3 SD TXD Send data with LED indicator 4 ER DTR Data terminal ready 5 SG GND Signal ground 6 DR DSR Data set ready 7 RS RTS Sending request receiving enable 1 8 CS CTS S...

Page 669: ... the CD signal is not required For the CD signal the 232IF indicates only the status 2 The 232IF indicates only the status PLC side RS 232C external equipment side Name Name 9 pin D Sub 25 pin D Sub SD TXD 3 SD TXD 3 2 RD RXD 2 RD RXD 2 3 RS RTS 7 RS RTS 7 4 CS CTS 8 CS CTS 8 5 ER DTR 4 ER DTR 4 20 DR DSR 6 DR DSR 6 6 SG GND 5 SG GND 5 7 1 1 2 2 FX2N 232IF In the interlink connection mode the 232I...

Page 670: ...instructions but also direct specification of the buffer memory U G using the MOV instruction etc Receiving completed status Device memory Data register D Internal relay M FX2N FX3U FX2NC FX3UC PLC FX2N 232IF Communication equipment Buffer memory Communication format Sending command Error reset Send data Receive data TO instruction TO instruction FROM instruction FROM instruction Printer Bar code ...

Page 671: ...ed read to n devices starting from inside the PLC 2 32 bit operation DFROM and DFROMP Special function block BFM PLC word device n 32 bit data starting from buffer memory BFM No m2 inside the special function block No m1 are transferred read to n devices starting from 1 inside the PLC Operand Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Index Constant Pointer X ...

Page 672: ...PLC are transferred written to n buffer memories starting from the buffer memory No m2 inside the special function block No m1 Operand Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Index Constant Pointer X Y M T C S KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D V Z Modify K H P m1 m2 n Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit...

Page 673: ...in special function block No 1 and transferring it to D0 Example 2 When writing the numeric value K1 to buffer memory No 1000 in special function block No 1 pulse operation type Example 3 When multiplying the value stored in buffer memory No 1000 in special function block No 1 by the numeric value K2 and writing the multiplication result to buffer memories Nos 2000 and 2001 in special function blo...

Page 674: ...st order 2 bytes Receiving header highest order 2 bytes 4 bytes maximum 0 suppression 0 no header 0 W 10 11 Receiving terminator lowest order 2 bytes Receiving terminator highest order 2 bytes 4 bytes maximum 0 suppression 0 no terminator 0 W 12 Receiving suspension waiting time in interlink connection mode 0 to 32767 10 ms 0 W 13 Amount of remaining send data 0 to 512 when data length is 16 bit 0...

Page 675: ...struction G Non Protocol Communication FX 2N 232IF H Programming Communication I Remote Maintenance Apx A Discontinued models R Read only W Read or Write 1 Provided for preliminary buffers for the interlink connection mode Caution Buffer memories specified as W For write can be read also Do not use undefined buffer memory numbers in programs 2257 to 2271 Preliminary receive data buffer for interli...

Page 676: ...wn in the table below use the following program Bit Contents 0 1 Initial value b0 Data length 7 bit 8 bit 1 8 bit b1 b2 Parity 00 Not provided 01 Odd 11 Even 11 Even b3 Stop bit 1 bit 2 bit 0 1 bit b4 b5 b6 b7 Baud rate bps 0011 300 0100 600 0101 1200 0110 2400 0111 4800 1000 9600 1001 19200 1000 9600 bps b8 b9 Control line 00 Not provided 00 Not provided 01 Standard RS 232C 11 RS 232C interlink m...

Page 677: ...t 3 b9 and b8 control line 1 When control line not provided b9 0 b8 0 is specified data is transferred using only the SD and RD signals without using the control line 2 When the standard RS 232C mode b9 0 b8 1 is specified use a cross cable to connect equipment with the terminal specifications and use a straight cable to connect equipment with the modem specifications 3 When the RS 232C interlink ...

Page 678: ...1 to 1256 is converted into ASCII data before being sent And the received ASCII data is converted into the hexadecimal numeric value data 0 to F before being stored in the received data buffer BFM 2001 to 2256 The number of sent received bytes at this time indicates the amount of hexadecimal data Sending format during conversion from hexadecimal data into ASCII data Example When the send data is 1...

Page 679: ...ccording to the buffer data length Highest order 8 bit are ignored Only lowest order 8 bit are sent and received as valid data Send receive data buffer Send receive data buffer 16 bit data is divided into lowest order 8 bit and highest order 8 bit when being sent or received Example of send data buffer 2 8 bit b14 1 Example of send data buffer 1 16 bit b14 0 S T X BFM 1001 lowest order byte BFM 10...

Page 680: ...ing set items are determined BFM 5 and 4 sending header BFM 7 and 6 sending terminator 3 b2 receiving complete flag reset command When b2 is set to ON the following items are cleared BFM 28 b1 receiving complete BFM 2000 number of received bytes BFM 2001 to 2256 receive data buffer After receiving is completed it is necessary to clear the receiving complete status BFM 28 b1 because the 232IF canno...

Page 681: ...ON 5 4 6 Sending header BFM 5 highest order 2 bytes and BFM 4 lowest order 2 bytes Setting range 4 bytes maximum 0 suppression The initial value is 0 no sending header Up to four headers can be specified for the 232IF send data When the number of headers is less than 4 0 s in upper positions are ignored 0 suppression and are not transferred The transfer order is fourth header third header second h...

Page 682: ...FF until the receiving suspended status bit BFM 28 b4 is set to ON Make sure that the time set by BFM 12 is longer than the time between when the 232IF sets the receiving enable RS signal to OFF until the external equipment completely suspends sending If the receiving suspended status bit BFM 28 b4 is set to ON before the external equipment stops sending the 232IF cannot receive the remaining data...

Page 683: ...sum result BFM 16 Initial value 0 This buffer stores the sum check value of the received data If the check sum value added to the received data is different from the receiving sum result receiving sum check error occurs The sum check target range and check sum calculation method are the same as those shown in 5 4 13 Sending sum result above 5 4 15 Time from CS ON to sending start BFM 20 Set value ...

Page 684: ...plete flag reset command BFM 1 b2 is executed 4 b3 error occurrence When an error occurs during sending or receiving the error occurrence status bit b3 is set to ON and the contents of the error are stored in the error code BFM 29 5 b4 receiving suspended When the 232IF receives data beyond the maximum number of receivable bytes BFM 2 in the RS 232C interlink connection mode BFM 0 b9 1 b8 1 it set...

Page 685: ...ived bytes BFM 2000 Stored value 0 to 512 30 1 bytes when the buffer data length is 16 bit 0 to 256 15 1 bytes when the buffer data length is 8 bit This buffer stores the number of bytes received from the external equipment The value stored in this buffer is cleared when the receiving complete flag reset command BFM 1 b2 is given 1 30 or 15 bytes are provided for the preliminary buffer in the inte...

Page 686: ...y BFM 20 multiplied by 10 ms Time set by BFM 20 multiplied by 10 ms Set this bit to OFF in the sequence program While it remains ON the next data cannot be sent OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF The receiving waiting status is started Message 2 After receiving is completed and the received data is read set the receiving complete flag BFM 28 b1 to OFF using the receiving complete flag reset command Set this bit ...

Page 687: ...N ON The receiving waiting status is started ON Message 1 Message 4 Message 2 Message 3 Value set by BFM 21 multiplied by 10 ms Value set by BFM 21 Time set by BFM 20 multiplied by 10 ms Set this bit to OFF in the sequence program While it remains ON the next data cannot be sent After receiving is completed and the received data is read set the receiving complete flag BFM 28 b1 to OFF using the re...

Page 688: ... to 2271 to data registers in the PLC and then set it to ON Set this bit to OFF in the sequence program While it remains ON the next receiving complete flag reset command cannot be given OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Sending receiving enable BFM 1 b0 Sending command BFM 1 b1 Sending complete BFM 28 b0 RD RXD Receive data Receiving complete BFM 28 b1 Receiving complete flag reset command BFM ...

Page 689: ...nt and the data received from the external equipment is stored to data registers D301 to D304 in the PLC 1 System configuration 2 Example of setting buffer memory Suppose that each buffer memory not described here is set to the initial value 1 Communication format BFM 0 2 Command BFM 1 M0 b0 Sending receiving enable ER ON M1 b1 Sending command M2 b2 Receiving complete flag reset command M3 b3 Erro...

Page 690: ...ined b4 M14 Receiving suspended b12 M22 DR DSR b5 M15 Undefined b13 M23 CD DCD b6 M16 Sending b14 M24 CS CTS b7 M17 Receiving b15 M25 CI RI 6 Number of bytes to be sent BFM 1000 9 bytes 7 Send data buffer BFM 1001 and later The send data Test data in ASCII codes is provided to 9 bytes as specified in BFM 1000 8 Receive data buffer BFM 2001 and later Eight bytes specified by the maximum number of r...

Page 691: ... 7 0 BFM 1 b1 Sending command M0 6 5 4 3 2 1 M2 Maximum number of receivable bytes BFM 14 Amount of received data buffers BFM 28 b1 Receiving complete BFM 1 b2 Receiving complete flag reset command BFM 2001 to 2256 Received data buffer BFM 2000 Number of received bytes M11 When the receiving complete flag is not reset The contents of received data buffer are cleared also 8 7 0 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 0 2 3 ...

Page 692: ... D302 BFM 2003 D303 BFM 2004 D304 Receiving complete flag reset command M 2 Y 1 Y 0 The status is monitored if necessary M 0 Sending receiving is enabled M10 M13 Sending complete Error occurrence FNC 79 TO K 0 K1000 D200 K 6 M8002 Initial pulse The communication format is transferred 009FH BFM 0 FNC 79 TO K0 K2 K8 K1 The maximum number of receivable bytes is transferred K 8 BFM 2 Block No BFM Tran...

Page 693: ...1 System configuration 2 Example of setting buffer memory Suppose that each buffer memory not described here is set to the initial value 1 Communication format BFM 0 2 Command BFM 1 M0 b0 Sending receiving enable ER ON M1 b1 Sending command M2 b2 Receiving complete flag reset command M3 b3 Error reset 3 Maximum number of receivable bytes BFM 2 8 bytes 4 Header and terminator BFM 4 to 11 BFM 4 and ...

Page 694: ...iving b15 M25 CI RI 6 Number of bytes to be sent BFM 1000 9 bytes 7 Send data buffer BFM 1001 and later The send data Test data in ASCII code is provided to 9 bytes as specified in BFM 1000 8 Receive data buffer BFM 2001 and later Eight bytes specified by the maximum number of receivable bytes BFM 2 are read to data registers D301 to D308 in the PLC BFM 1001 BFM 1002 BFM 1003 BFM 1004 BFM 1005 Ign...

Page 695: ...end data 9 8 7 0 BFM 1 b1 Sending command M0 6 5 4 3 2 1 M2 Maximum number of receivable bytes BFM 14 Amount of received data buffers BFM 28 b1 Receiving complete BFM 1 b2 Receiving complete flag reset command BFM 2001 to 2256 Received data buffer BFM 2000 Number of received bytes M11 When the receiving complete flag is not reset The contents of received data buffer are cleared also 8 7 0 6 5 4 3 ...

Page 696: ... MOV H73 D203 MOV H74 D204 MOV H20 D205 MOV H64 D206 MOV H61 D207 MOV H74 D208 MOV H61 D209 The status is read BFM 28 b15 to b0 M25 to M10 Error reset input The commands are transferred M3 to M0 BFM 1 b3 to b0 Receiving complete BFM 2001 D301 BFM 2002 D302 BFM 2003 D303 BFM 2004 D304 Receiving complete flag reset command Sending complete Error occurrence D200 K 9 BFM 1000 D201 t BFM 1001 D202 e BF...

Page 697: ...or is not used verify that the quantity of data to be sent matches the receivable data quantity If the quantity of send data may vary use the terminator 7 Verify that the external equipment is operating normally 8 Verify that the adopted data format is uniform If the data format is different modify it 7 2 Error Codes When an error occurs while data is being sent or received the 232IF sets bit 3 of...

Page 698: ...G 42 FX Series PLC User s Manual Data Communication Edition Non Protocol Communication FX2N 232IF 7 Troubleshooting 7 2 Error Codes MEMO ...

Page 699: ...s manual explains programming communication provided for the MELSEC F FX Series Programmable Controllers and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION This manual confers no industrial property rights or...

Page 700: ...H 2 FX Series PLC User s Manual Data Communication Edition Programming Communication ...

Page 701: ...n a personal computer This function is provided for the FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC Series 4 It is possible to monitor devices using one programming tool and change programs using another programming tool This function is not provided for the FX2 FX FX2C and FX0N Series 5 Two HMIs or one HMI and one programming tool can be connected at the same time This function is not provided in the FX2 FX F...

Page 702: ... PLC serial communication setting Communication setting is not necessary Confirm that setting is provided In added communication extension equipment standard built in port is not provided Set personal computer connection Refer to Chapter 6 Setting connection of Windows software Communication port for connecting personal computer Selecting the baud rate Ethernet port setting Communication test Wind...

Page 703: ...20 or later is applicable to the FX3S PLC 1 3 2 Products whose production was stopped Production was stopped for some models of MELSEC F Series PLCs and programming tools described in this manual For models whose production was stopped refer to Appendix A To see the latest available products refer to the general catalog PLC Standard built in port in accordance with RS 422 Optional communication eq...

Page 704: ...1 87R or later FX 30P Ver 1 30 or later GOT1000 Series display units Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable models and versions supporting the list editor function FX3S PLC GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 E Ver 1 492N or later FX 30P Ver 1 50 or later GOT1000 Series display units Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable models and versions supporting the list ...

Page 705: ...r later FX 30P Ver 1 00 or later GOT1000 Series display units Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable models and versions supporting the list editor function FX3GC PLC GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 J Ver 1 77F or later The setting of the FX3U ENET ADP is supported in Ver 1 90U or later FX 30P Ver 1 30 or later GOT1000 Series display units Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display ...

Page 706: ... Ver 5 00 or later FX 30P Ver 1 00 or later FX 20P SET0 FX 20P MFXD Ver 5 00 or later FX 10P SET0 Ver 4 00 or later GOT F900 Series display units F940WGOT TWD F940GOT WD F940GOT BD H F940GOT BD RH F940WGOT TWD Ver 1 00 or later F940GOT LWD F940GOT SWD Ver 1 00 or later F940GOT LBD H F940GOT SBD H Ver 1 00 or later F940GOT LBD RH F940GOT SBD RH Ver 1 00 or later GOT1000 Series display units Refer t...

Page 707: ...d Ethernet adapter required by FX PLCs 2 1 System Configuration This section outlines the system configuration required to use programming communication Connect optional communication equipment operating in accordance with RS 422 RS 232C USB or Ethernet adapter to a built in port of the FX PLC or the FX PLC main unit 2 1 1 For communication equipment operating in accordance with RS 422 Communicati...

Page 708: ...to the PLC reducing the installation area Important point in selection Attach the special adapter expansion board to the main unit and then attach the communication adapter to the left side of the main unit Total extension distance 15 m 49 2 15 m 49 2 1 2 Communication adapter Attach the communication adapter to the left side of the main unit 4 3 For communication equipment combinations for each F...

Page 709: ...ding on the Ethernet equipment used and indicate the communication equipment combination patterns 1 2 3 Attach the connector conversion adapter to the main unit and then attach the FX3U ENET ADP to the left side of the main unit FX3U ENET ADP FX PLC FX3U ENET ADP FX3U ENET ADP FX3U ENET ADP Connector conversion board Important point in selection Attach the connector conversion board to the main un...

Page 710: ...nly one unit of communication equipment can be connected In the FX0 FX0S and FX0N Series only the standard built in port 8 pin MINI DIN is provided In the FX1 FX2 FX and FX2C Series only the standard built in port 25 pin D Sub type is provided FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX1S Standard built in port 8 pin MINI DIN 50 m 164 0 15 m 49 2 15 m 49 2 FX1N Stand...

Page 711: ...INI DIN 50 m 164 0 15 m 49 2 15 m 49 2 FX3S RS 422 Standard built in port 8 pin MINI DIN USB Standard built in port Mini B 50 m 164 0 15 m 49 2 15 m 49 2 Maximum segment length 1 100 m 328 1 1 Indicates the distance between the hub and a node The maximum distance varies depending on the Ethernet equipment used FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX2N 422 BD 8 pi...

Page 712: ... USB Standard built in port Mini B 50 m 164 0 15 m 49 2 15 m 49 2 Maximum segment length 1 100 m 328 1 1 Indicates the distance between the hub and a node The maximum distance varies depending on the Ethernet equipment used FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX3G 422 BD 8 pin MINI DIN FX3G 232 BD 9 pin D SUB male FX3U 232ADP MB 9 pin D sub male FX3G CNV ADP FX3...

Page 713: ...t in port 8 pin MINI DIN USB Standard built in port Mini B When using channel 1 ch 1 The communication equipment works as ch1 when connected to the option connector 1 50 m 164 0 The communication equipment works as ch1 when connected to the option connector 1 15 m 49 2 15 m 49 2 Maximum segment length 1 100 m 328 1 1 Indicates the distance between the hub and a node The maximum distance varies dep...

Page 714: ... available when the FX3G 8AV BD FX3G 4EX BD or FX3G 2EYT BD is connected to the option connector 2 15 m 49 2 Ch2 is not available when the FX3G 8AV BD FX3G 4EX BD or FX3G 2EYT BD is connected to the option connector 2 Maximum segment length 1 100 m 328 1 1 Indicates the distance between the hub and a node The maximum distance varies depending on the Ethernet equipment used FX Series Communication ...

Page 715: ...intenance Apx A Discontinued models FX3U Standard built in port 8 pin MINI DIN When using channel 1 ch 1 50 m 164 0 15 m 49 2 5 m 16 4 15 m 49 2 Maximum segment length 1 100 m 328 1 1 Indicates the distance between the hub and a node The maximum distance varies depending on the Ethernet equipment used FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX3U 422 BD 8 pin MINI DI...

Page 716: ...0 m 328 1 FX1NC Standard built in port 8 pin MINI DIN 15 m 49 2 FX2NC Standard built in port 8 pin MINI DIN 15 m 49 2 1 Indicates the distance between the hub and a node The maximum distance varies depending on the Ethernet equipment used FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check Where represents 232 422 485 USB and 8AV FX3U 232ADP MB 9 pin D Sub male ch2 R D S D ch1 ...

Page 717: ... Discontinued models FX3GC Standard built in port 8 pin MINI DIN USB Standard built in port Mini B When using channel 1 ch 1 15 m 49 2 When using channel 2 ch 2 15 m 49 2 Maximum segment length 1 100 m 328 1 1 Indicates the distance between the hub and a node The maximum distance varies depending on the Ethernet equipment used FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check...

Page 718: ...unication port channel 15 m 49 2 When a FX3U CF ADP is used it occupies one communication port channel Maximum segment length 1 100 m 328 1 1 Indicates the distance between the hub and a node The maximum distance varies depending on the Ethernet equipment used FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX3U 232ADP MB 9 pin D Sub male ch1 FX3U 232ADP MB FX3U 485ADP MB F...

Page 719: ...nce Apx A Discontinued models FX3UC 32MT LT 2 Standard built in port 8 pin MINI DIN When using channel 1 ch 1 50 m 164 0 15 m 49 2 5 m 16 4 15 m 49 2 Maximum segment length 1 100 m 328 1 1 Indicates the distance between the hub and a node The maximum distance varies depending on the Ethernet equipment used FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX3U 422 BD 8 pin MI...

Page 720: ...nnel 15 m 49 2 When a FX3U CF ADP is used it occupies one communication port channel Maximum segment length 1 100 m 328 1 1 Indicates the distance between the hub and a node The maximum distance varies depending on the Ethernet equipment used FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX3U BD Where represents 232 422 485 USB and 8AV FX3U 232ADP MB 9 pin D Sub male ch2 ...

Page 721: ...klight is set at the initial value 4 If the LCD backlight is set at the maximum value 8 it is handled as 155mA Peripheral equipment Connection cable Current con sumption at 5V DC 1 FX 30P FX 20P CAB0 or FX 20P CAB FX 20P CADP 115 mA 2 FX 20P E 180 mA FX 10P E 120 mA Personal computer for programming F2 232CAB for 25 pin D Sub F2 232CAB 1 for 9 pin D Sub or F2 232CAB 2 for 14 pin half pitch FX 232A...

Page 722: ...ction 3 For FX2N Ver 3 00 or later and FX2NC Ver 3 00 or later PLCs 1 Verify that the communication format is in the initial status D8120 K0 Check the communication parameters using the peripheral equipment If the communication is set so that non protocol procedure RS instruction or a dedicated protocol is used clear the setting to 0 using the peripheral equipment 2 If RS instruction is used in th...

Page 723: ...he shape male or female etc of the connector of the connected programming tool such as personal computer and the shape of the connector of the PLC and verify that connection is possible 2 Connecting the cable connector to the programming tool Check the shape of the cable connector for the programming tool and connect the cable correctly 3 Connecting the cable connector to the PLC Check the cable c...

Page 724: ...2 BD FX3G 232 BD FX3U 232 BD FX2NC 232ADP FX3U 232ADP MB FX3U USB BD FX3U ENET ADP 25 pin D Sub female 13 1 25 14 8 pin MINI DIN female 3 2 1 5 4 8 7 6 USB Mini B connector 8 pin MINI DIN female 3 2 1 5 4 8 7 6 25 pin D Sub female 13 1 25 14 9 pin D Sub male 5 1 9 6 USB Mini B connector 8 1 RJ45 type modular jack Handy programming panel FX 10P E FX 10P SET0 E FX 20P E FX 20P SET0 E FX 30P Personal...

Page 725: ...N 422 BD FX3G 422 BD FX3U 422 BD 1 5 m 4 11 Standard built in port 1 8 m 5 10 Standard built in port 1 5 m 4 11 FX 10P SET0 E FX 20P SET0 E FX 30P Standard built in port FX1N 422 BD FX2N 422 BD FX3G 422 BD FX3U 422 BD 1 5 m 4 11 Standard built in port 1 5 m 4 11 P I 8 pin MINI DIN female 3 2 1 5 4 8 7 6 FX 20P CAB0 1 5 m 4 11 sold separately RS 422 RS 422 8 pin MINI DIN female 3 2 1 5 4 8 7 6 FX 2...

Page 726: ...4 5 m 14 9 FX1N 232 BD FX2N 232 BD FX3G 232 BD FX3U 232 BD FX2NC 232ADP FX3U 232ADP MB 3 m 9 10 FX0N 232ADP 3 m 9 10 9 pin D Sub male 5 1 9 6 F2 232CAB 1 3 m 9 10 sold separately FX 232AW FX 232AWC FX 232AWC H FX 422CAB0 1 5 m 4 11 sold separately RS 232C RS 422 8 pin MINI DIN female 3 2 1 5 4 8 7 6 F2 232CAB 1 3 m 9 10 sold separately FX 232AW FX 232AWC FX 232AWC H FX 422CAB 0 3 m 0 11 sold separ...

Page 727: ...6 4 Maxi mum Standard built in port 3 m 9 10 PC AT compatible machine FX3U ENET ADP Programming tool connector shape Cable combination PLC connector shape Cable length USB A connector USB RS 422 FX USB AW USB cable 3 m 9 10 supplied with 8 pin MINI DIN female 3 2 1 5 4 8 7 6 USB USB cable 3 m 9 10 supplied with USB USB Mini B connector USB GT09 C30USB 5P 3 m 9 10 sold separately To be purchased fr...

Page 728: ...9 10 Programming tool connector shape Cable combination PLC connector shape Cable length 14 pin Half pitch female 14 7 1 8 F2 232CAB 2 3 m 9 10 sold separately FX 232AW FX 232AWC FX 232AWC H FX 422CAB0 1 5 m 4 11 sold separately RS 232C RS 422 8 pin MINI DIN female 3 2 1 5 4 8 7 6 F2 232CAB 2 3 m 9 10 sold separately FX 232AW FX 232AWC FX 232AWC H FX 422CAB 0 3 m 0 11 sold separately FX 422CAB 150...

Page 729: ... port 3 3 m 10 9 4 5 m 14 9 FX1N 232 BD FX2N 232 BD FX3G 232 BD FX3U 232 BD FX2NC 232ADP FX3U 232ADP MB 3 m 9 10 FX0N 232ADP 3 m 9 10 Programming tool connector shape Cable combination PLC connector shape Cable length 25 pin D Sub female 13 1 25 14 F2 232CAB 3 m 9 10 sold separately FX 232AW FX 232AWC FX 232AWC H FX 422CAB0 1 5 m 4 11 sold separately RS 232C RS 422 8 pin MINI DIN female 3 2 1 5 4 ...

Page 730: ...CAB0 FX 20P CAB FX 422CAB0 FX 20P CADP FX USB AW converter USB cable Provided as an accessory of FX USB AW and FX3U USB BD GT09 C30USB 5P MR J3USBCBL3M FX 232CAB 1 F2 232CAB 1 FX 232CAB 2 F2 232CAB 2 F2 232CAB 1 F2 232CAB B Side A Side B Side A Side 8 pin MINI DIN male 5 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 USB Mini B plug 9 pin D Sub female 1 5 6 9 25 pin D Sub male 1 13 14 25 25 pin D Sub female 13 1 25 14 8 pin MINI ...

Page 731: ...programming tool connector and PLC connector combinations of the cable converter and communication equipment can be checked Interface RS 422 RS 232C USB Ethernet Standard port FX0 FX0S FX0N FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC FX1 FX2 FX FX2C A QnA FX3S FX3G FX3GC Communication equipment FX1N 422 BD FX2N 422 BD FX3G 422 BD FX3U 422 BD FX1N 232 BD FX2N 232 BD FX3G 232 BD FX3U 232 B...

Page 732: ... FX 232AWC FX 232AWC H FX 422CAB0 F2 232CAB 1 FX 232AW FX 232AWC FX 232AWC H FX 422CAB or FX 422CAB 150 FX 232CAB 1 F2 232CAB 1 F2 232CAB 2 FX 232AW FX 232AWC FX 232AWC H FX 422CAB0 F2 232CAB 2 FX 232AW FX 232AWC FX 232AWC H FX 422CAB or FX 422CAB 150 FX 232CAB 2 F2 232CAB 2 F2 232CAB FX 232AW FX 232AWC FX 232AWC H FX 422CAB0 F2 232CAB FX 232AW FX 232AWC FX 232AWC H FX 422CAB or FX 422CAB 150 F2 2...

Page 733: ... 1 13 14 25 2 3 7 20 5 6 2 3 7 20 5 6 1 1 Communication port connector 25 pin D SUB male 1 13 14 25 2 7 3 6 8 4 5 7 3 6 20 1 4 5 SHELL SHELL 2 8 1 Communication port connector 25 pin D Sub male 1 13 14 25 1 Interlink supporting cables are not applicable Commercial cable 1 Reverse cross type RS 232C connection Personal computer connector 9 pin D Sub female 5 1 9 6 A 6 2 7 3 6 8 7 8 5 2 6 4 1 4 5 Fr...

Page 734: ...or 9 pin D Sub female 5 1 9 6 7 6 8 2 5 1 2 10 4 9 3 1 FG FG 3 11 4 12 13 14 FX 422CAB0 RS 422 connection Converter FX 232AW FX 232AWC FX 232AWC H 25 pin D Sub male 1 13 14 25 A 10 FX 422CAB 0 3 m 0 11 FX 422CAB 150 1 5 m 4 11 RS 422 connection Converter FX 232AW FX 232AWC FX 232AWC H 25 pin D Sub male 1 13 14 25 25 pin D Sub male 1 13 14 25 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 12 13 15 16 17 18 20 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 12 13 1...

Page 735: ... type RS 232C connection B 2 25 pin D Sub male 1 13 14 25 14 pin Half pitch FG FG 3 8 4 7 9 8 3 6 7 4 1 5 2 5 2 6 20 SHELL SHELL 2 7 3 6 11 12 13 4 10 2 1 4 9 14 5 1 8 15 14 11 5 7 17 3 8 13 20 6 FX 20P CADP RS 422 connection 25 pin D Sub female 1 13 14 25 8 pin MINI DIN male 5 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 B 3 2 3 7 12 15 16 20 5 8 18 2 7 3 5 1 4 6 8 The connector shape indicates the engagement surface Female ty...

Page 736: ...andard built in USB port 5 1 Check Procedure 1 Monitoring D8120 D8400 D8420 Turn ON the PLC power while it is in STOP mode and monitor D8120 D8400 D8420 1 When the value of D8120 D8400 D8420 is 0 The communication setting is not provided 2 When the value of D8120 D8400 D8420 is any value other than 0 The communication setting is provided 2 Checking absence presence of the parameter setting Check a...

Page 737: ...e refer to section 5 3 For details on GX Developer operating procedure refer to GX Developer Operating Manual For details on FX 30P operating procedure refer to FX 30P Operation Manual For details on FX3U ENET ADP refer to FX3U ENET ADP User s Manual 5 2 1 Operating procedure This subsection explains the serial communication setting method Suppose that GX Works2 is already started up 1 Opening the...

Page 738: ... to FX 30P Operation Manual 5 3 1 Operating procedure This subsection explains the serial communication setting method Suppose that FXGP WIN is already started up 1 Adjusting serial setting parameter Select Option Serial setting parameter from the toolbar The following dialog box appears according to absence presence of parameter settings 1 When there are no parameter settings The dialog box shown...

Page 739: ...dure refer to GX Developer Operating Manual 6 1 Connection Setting GX Works2 GX Works2 Windows software for personal computers has the following items to be set Set each item according to the connection status RS 232C USB Ethernet Communication port Transmission speed This setting is required to use the transparent function in the GOT described later Communication time check Number of retries Each...

Page 740: ...lude FX USB AW FX3U USB BD Connect the PLC to the RS 232C port in the personal computer Connect the PLC to the USB port in the personal computer using the FX USB AW or FX3U USB BD 2 Connection for selecting USB Connect the PLC to the USB port in the personal computer using the transparent function at the USB port in the GOT1000 Series Connect the standard USB port of the PLC to the USB port of the...

Page 741: ...Set these items according to the connection status COM port Select the communication port in the personal computer to be used among COM1 to COM63 Transmission speed Set the communication speed with the FX PLC The applicable transmission speed varies depending on each FX PLC Refer to the table below 1 For achieving communication at 38 4 57 6 or 115 2 kbps in an FX3S FX3G and FX3GC PLC the FX 232AWC...

Page 742: ...If the following setting is not provided a communication error will occur 1 Displaying the PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT window Double click GOT on the Transfer Setup dialog box to display the window shown below 2 Setting the CPU unit Set PLC Mode to FXCPU and select via GOT direct coupled transparent mode Transparent function of the GOT F900 Series The following setting is required when co...

Page 743: ...mmunication time check and number of retries is described below For details on GX Developer operating procedure refer to GX Developer Operating Manual 1 Displaying the communication time check number of retries setting window Double click the No Specification icon on the Transfer Setup dialog box The window below appears 2 Setting the communication time check and number of retries Check at communi...

Page 744: ...ow Select PLC Ports from the toolbar The window below appears 2 Setting the communication port and transmission speed Set these items according to the connection status Ports Select the communication port in the personal computer to be used among COM1 to COM9 Transfer speed Set the communication speed with the FX PLC The applicable transmission speed varies depending on the FX Series Refer to the ...

Page 745: ...l computers has a function to test communication with PLC Execute the communication test using the following procedure This section explains the method using GX Works2 1 In the project view area of the navigation window double click Connection Destination View Connection destination data name The window below appears Caution In GX Works2 Transfer Setup can be selected even while the monitor functi...

Page 746: ...uipment is not securely connected to the PLC communication is not possible For the mounting method refer to the respective communication equipment manual 7 5 Checking Parameters in PLC 1 Checking the communication setting Verify that non protocol communication or computer link communication is not set in the parameters of the FX PLC If such communication is already set programming communication wi...

Page 747: ...ons are used in the program the communication function is not available in ch1 Use ch2 or delete these instructions After deleting these instructions reboot the PLC s power 4 Presence of RS instruction except FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC PLCs Verify that the RS instruction is not used in the program If this instruction is used delete it turn OFF the PLC power and then turn the power ON again 5 P...

Page 748: ...FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC PLCs When a communication error occurs in the standard built in port M8062 turns ON and D8062 stores the corresponding error code 2 Checking the error code D8062 D8062 stores either of the following error codes 3 Checking M8063 and M8438 When a communication errors occur in optional communication equipment M8063 turns ON and D8063 stores the corresponding error code ...

Page 749: ...tomatically aligned The error code is stored in the special data register for the corresponding channel 7 9 Operation mode display D8419 and D8439 FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC These devices store the communication type being used 1 Detailed contents These devices store the code of the communication type currently being used in the communication port When communication port ch1 is used D8419 stores t...

Page 750: ...H 52 FX Series PLC User s Manual Data Communication Edition Programming Communication 7 Troubleshooting 7 9 Operation mode display D8419 and D8439 FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC MEMO ...

Page 751: ...anual explains remote maintenance provided for the MELSEC F FX Series Programmable Controllers and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION This manual confers no industrial property rights or any right...

Page 752: ...I 2 FX Series PLC User s Manual Data Communication Edition Remote Maintenance ...

Page 753: ...ograms during RUN 2 Maintenance can be performed by device monitoring PLC diagnosis forced ON OFF and changing set values and current values 3 A line can be established from a personal computer to a modem connected to a PLC For selection refer to Chapter 3 For wiring refer to Chapter 4 For the PLC model applicability refer to Chapter 2 Important points and reference chapter section Communication e...

Page 754: ... Transferring sequence program files between personal computers For wiring refer to Chapter 4 For the remote maintenance software refer to Chapter 3 Important points and reference chapter section System Commercial communication product For the remote maintenance software refer to Chapter 3 Setting in the modem For the personal computer side refer to Chapter 6 General telephone line Personal comput...

Page 755: ...n equipment Applicable modem list Refer to Chapter 3 Wiring procedure Cables supplied with modem Outline of system Applicable PLC versions Applicable programming tools Software for remote access Outline Refer to Chapter 1 Setting modem Setting modem connected to personal computer Set modem on personal computer remote access side Refer to Chapter 6 Programming tool Connect PLC 1 PLC communication s...

Page 756: ...on was stopped Production was stopped for some models of MELSEC F Series PLCs and programming tools described in this manual For models whose production was stopped refer to Appendix A To see the latest available products refer to the general catalog PLC Applicability Remarks FX3UC Series FX3U Series FX3GC Series FX3G Series FX3S Series FX2NC Series FX2N Series ME3314 OMRON is applicable to Ver 2 ...

Page 757: ...icable for each FX Series from the version shown 1 English versions Product name Model name Applicable version Remarks FX3U and FX3UC PLCs GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 E Ver 1 08J or later GX Developer SW D5C F GPPW E Ver 8 13P or later FX 30P Ver 1 00 or later FX3G PLC GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 E Ver 1 08J or later GX Developer SW D5C F GPPW E Ver 8 72A or later FX 30P Ver 1 00 or later FX3GC PLC GX Works2 ...

Page 758: ...or later FX 30P Ver 1 30 or later FX3S PLC GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 J Ver 1 492N or later FX 30P Ver 1 50 or later FX2N and FX2NC PLCs GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 J Ver 1 07H or later GX Developer SW D5C F GPPW J SW2 A or later FX PCS WIN SW0PC FXGP WIN Ver 2 10 or later FX PCS KIT 98 SW1PC FXGP 98 3 5 Ver 4 00 or later FX PCS 98 3 SW1PC FXGP 98 3 Ver 4 00 or later FX PCS KIT V 3 SW1PC FXGP V3 Ver 2 00 or ...

Page 759: ...el can be set in GX Developer SW2 A to Ver 8 18U 2 An alternative model can be set in GX Developer SW2 A to Ver 8 72A 3 Select FX2N in model selection when FX1N is not supported 4 An alternative model can be set in GX Developer SW2 A to SW5 A Model to be programmed Product name Model name is shown below Version allowing setting of alternative model Setting an alternative model Remarks FX3U FX3UC S...

Page 760: ...3 SW1PC FXGP 98 3 Ver 4 00 or later FX PCS KIT V 3 SW1PC FXGP V3 Ver 2 00 or later FX A7PHP KIT SW1RX GPPFX Ver 3 00 or later FX3G FX3GC Series GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 J Ver 1 64S or later FX3G GX Developer SW D5C F GPPW J SW2 A or later 2 FX1N 3 The PP modem mode ch1 and PP modem mode ch2 cannot be set FX PCS WIN SW0PC FXGP WIN Ver 2 10 or later FX PCS KIT 98 SW1PC FXGP 98 3 5 Ver 4 00 or later FX ...

Page 761: ...LC GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 E Ver 1 77F or later FX3S PLC GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 E Ver 1 492N or later FX2N and FX2NC PLCs GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 E Ver 1 64S or later GX Developer SW D5C F GPPW E SW2 A or later FX PCS WIN E SW0PC FXGP WIN E Ver 1 00 or later FX1S FX1N and FX1NC PLCs GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 E Ver 1 64S or later GX Developer SW D5C F GPPW E SW5 A or later FX PCS WIN E SW0PC FXGP WIN E Ver ...

Page 762: ... FXGP WIN 1 The remote maintenance function cannot be used when FXGP WIN is used in the following versions of Windows Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP 2 For FX3U and FX3UC Series The models FX3U and FX3UC cannot be selected FX2N can be selected and set as the alternative model However FXGP WIN cannot be connected to a PLC in which the PP modem mode is set 3 For FX3S FX3G and FX3GC Series The...

Page 763: ...le below Specification items such as baud rate cannot be changed Only modems supporting the communication specifications below can be used Item Modem mode Remarks Transmission standard RS 232C standard Maximum total extension distance 15 m 49 2 or less Protocol type Modem mode Communication method Half duplex asynchronous system Baud rate 9600 bps Modem PLC Modem Personal computer Character format...

Page 764: ...on adapter to the left side of the main unit Communication adapter Connector conversion adapter Communication equipment operating in accordance with RS 232C FX PLC Communication board Communication adapter Special adapter expansion board This is the communication board built into the PLC reducing the installation area Important point in selection Attach the special adapter expansion board to the m...

Page 765: ...rk in the Check column During selection pay attention to the following In the table below only the outside dimensions and D SUB connector shape are different between units shown in FX2NC 232ADP FX0N 232ADP Select either one Remote maintenance is not provided for the FX1 FX2 FX FX2C FX0 FX0S and FX0N PLCs FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX1S 15 m 49 2 15 m 49...

Page 766: ... 40 point 60 point type When using channel 1 ch 1 The communication equipment works as ch1 when connected to the option connector 1 15 m 49 2 15 m 49 2 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX3G 232 BD 9 pin D Sub male FX3U 232ADP MB 9 pin D Sub male FX3S CNV ADP FX3G 232 BD 9 pin D Sub male FX3U 232ADP MB 9 pin D Sub male FX3G CNV ADP FX3G 232 BD 9 pin D Sub male...

Page 767: ... When using channel 2 ch 2 1 The communication equipment works as ch2 when connected to the option connector 2 15 m 49 2 Ch2 is not available when the FX3G 8AV BD FX3G 4EX BD or FX3G 2EYT BD is connected to the option connector 2 15 m 49 2 FX3U When using channel 1 ch 1 15 m 49 2 15 m 49 2 1 When using ch2 in an FX3G PLC it can be set only in the PP modem mode ch2 FX Series Communication equipment...

Page 768: ...nnel 2 ch 2 2 15 m 49 2 1 When using ch2 in an FX3U PLC it can be set only in the PP modem mode ch2 2 When using ch2 in an FX3GC PLC it can be set only in the PP modem mode ch2 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX3U 232ADP MB 9 pin D Sub male ch2 R D S D ch1 FX3U BD Where represents 232 422 485 USB and 8AV FX3U 232ADP MB FX3U 485ADP MB FX3U CF ADP FX3U CNV BD ...

Page 769: ...X3U CF ADP is used it occupies one communication port channel 15 m 49 2 FX3UC 32MT LT 2 When using channel 1 ch 1 15 m 49 2 15 m 49 2 When using channel 2 ch 2 1 When a FX3U 8AV BD is used it occupies one communication port channel 15 m 49 2 When a FX3U CF ADP is used it occupies one communication port channel 15 m 49 2 FX Series Communication equipment option Total extension distance Check FX3U 2...

Page 770: ...h1 and PP modem mode ch2 Select a modem supporting the communication specifications shown below 1 User registration mode If the modem used does not support the communication specifications shown above communication is not possible 2 PP modem mode ch1 and PP modem mode ch2 If the modem used does not support the communication specifications shown above communication is not possible Item Contents Com...

Page 771: ...mmand shown below in ASCII code to a data register D1000 and later usually and D200 or later in the FX1S PLC For the setting procedure refer to Chapter 5 1 Production is finished as of August 2010 Manufacturer AT command setting for modem on PLC side AT command Remarks Modem model name GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 GX Developer SW D5C GPPW FX PCS WIN Manufactured by I O DATA DEVICE INC DFML 560ER Input AT...

Page 772: ...e model ME5614E Manufacturer AT command setting for modem on personal computer side for remote access Remarks Modem model name GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 GX Developer SW D5C GPPW FX PCS WIN Manufactured by I O DATA DEVICE INC DFML 560ER AT C1E0Q0S0 2 K0 D0 Manufactured by AIWA CO LTD PV AF288 1 Select this model AT command is shown for reference ATE0S0 2Q0V1 M4 J0 Q0 PV AF3360 1 Select this model AT co...

Page 773: ...connector shape When a cable is included with the modem check the shape of the RS 232C connector in the personal computer to be connected the shape of the connector in the communication equipment operating in accordance with RS 232C for the PLC and male or female type 3 Connecting the RS 232C ports in the modem and the PLC with a cable Check the shape of the connector number of pins in the communi...

Page 774: ...n accordance with RS 232C for the FX PLC 1 The FX2NC 232ADP does not use the CD signal FX0N 232ADP FX1N 232 BD FX2N 232 BD FX2NC 232ADP FX3G 232 BD FX3U 232 BD FX3U 232ADP MB Signal name Function 25 pin D Sub female 9 pin D Sub male 1 1 CD Receiving carrier detection 3 2 RD RXD Receive data input 2 3 SD TXD Send data output 20 4 ER DTR Data terminal ready 7 5 SG GND Signal ground 6 6 DR DSR Data s...

Page 775: ...reens for the FX3U PLC are shown as examples 5 1 1 Setting communication by way of RS 232C port It is not necessary to set the serial communication with a modem However it is necessary to verify that another communication type is not used and whether the communication setting is correct using the following procedure In FX PLCs the communication setting can be executed using either of the following...

Page 776: ...ems on the PLC Side 5 1 Setting Using GX Works2 2 Checking the serial communication parameter setting Click the PLC System 2 tab on the dialog box Make sure that the Operate Communication Setting box is cleared and click the End button If a check mark is there clear it and then click the End button ...

Page 777: ... 2 Modem initialization setting using parameter method This subsection explains how to select the AT command for initialization registered in the PLC and how to set the AT command for an unregistered modem 1 Opening the PLC parameter setting window In the project view area of the navigation window double click Parameter PLC Parameter If the navigation window is not displayed select View Docking Wi...

Page 778: ... PLC from the menu bar Click Parameter PLC Parameter Network Parameter in the project tree When the AT command is set for an unregistered modem next put a check mark next to Device Memory MAIN After placing the check mark click the Execute button to write the contents to the FX PLC Set item Description Modem model name Manufacturer None Select this item when remote maintenance is not used User Reg...

Page 779: ...AT command for unregistered modem Only when MODEM Initialized is set to User Register Mode PP Modem Mode CH1 or PP Modem Mode CH2 execute the following setting The modem initialization setting depends on the setting contents of the PLC System 1 tab displayed when Parameter PLC Parameter is selected 1 Display a device memory In the project view area of the navigation window double click Device Memo...

Page 780: ...aying the device list Select Input Device on the Edit menu to display the Input Device dialog box Set Device Range Display Mode and Register and click OK The device data register number to be set varies depending on the PLC as shown below PLC Device range FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC PLC D1000 to D1059 FX1S and FX3S PLC D200 to D255 ...

Page 781: ...ext dialog box Input one half width character and click the OK button 1 AT command structure For initializing a modem use the AT command developed by Hayes The Hayes AT command is generally expressed in the following format For details on the AT command refer to the manual of the modem to be used 2 Input example of the AT command for initialization Example ATE0S0 2Q1 D0 M4 Q0 J0 W Data register No...

Page 782: ...ems on the PLC Side 5 1 Setting Using GX Works2 4 Inputting CR and LF It is necessary to input CR and LF at the end of the AT command Input 0D and 0A hexadecimal values to data registers respectively If CR 0DH and LF 0AH are not input at the end of the AT command remote maintenance is not possible ...

Page 783: ...ct using the following procedure In FX PLCs the communication setting can be executed using either of the following two methods 1 Writing the value 0 to the data register D8120 using a sequence program If another communication type is already set for another application delete the sequence program which writes a value to D8120 2 Setting parameters using a sequence programming tool By using the fol...

Page 784: ...r the AT command setting method for unregistered modems refer to Subsection 5 2 3 The AT command setting is not required when AIWA PV AF288 or OMRON ME3314B is selected 4 Writing the program to the PLC Click PLC Transfers Write from the toolbar to display the Program write dialog box Select All range and click the OK button When the AT command is set for an unregistered modem transfer the register...

Page 785: ...User entry mode is selected in Modem initialize execute the following setting The modem initialization setting depends on the setting contents of the window displayed when Option PLC s mode setting is selected from the toolbar 1 Displaying the device list Select View Register view from the toolbar 2 Executing the display setting Select the set items as shown in the table below and click the OK but...

Page 786: ...use the AT command developed by Hayes The Hayes AT command is generally expressed in the following format For details on the AT command refer to the manual of the modem to be used 2 Input example of the AT command for initialization Example ATE0S0 2Q1 D0 M4 Q0 J0 W Data register No ASCII code Hexadecimal value Data register No ASCII code Hexadecimal value D1000 A 41 D1013 26 D1001 T 54 D1014 M 4D ...

Page 787: ...t the end of the AT command Input 000D and 000A hexadecimal values to data registers respectively If CR 0DH and LF 0AH are not input at the end of the AT command remote maintenance is disabled 5 3 Cautions on Use 1 Cautions on inputting the AT command for initialization to the PLC 1 The AT command finishes sending when 0 hexadecimal value is read 2 When creating a sequence program make sure that t...

Page 788: ... operating procedure refer to GX Developer Operating Manual 6 1 Setting Using GX Works2 This section explains the line connection setting method using GX Works2 6 1 1 Registering AT command for connected modem This subsection explains how to register the AT command for initializing a modem connected to the personal computer 1 Setting the AT command Select Tools Set TEL Data Connect via Modem AT Co...

Page 789: ...create the AT command 3 Contents of help for the AT command The table below shows the contents of description about Help of AT Command Setting example AT C1Q0V1 N3 D0 K0 Modem manufacturer name Modem model name AT command set value Remarks I O DATA DEVICE INC DFML 560ER AT C1E0Q0S0 2 K0 D0 AIWA CO LTD PV BF5606 ATE0S0 2 K0 D0 OMRON Corporation ME5614E ATE0S0 2 K0 D0 Modem version F W Ver 2 300 ME5...

Page 790: ... register the telephone number of the counterpart line connected to the modem of the desired PLC 1 Displaying the telephone directory dialog box Select Tools Set TEL Data Connect via Modem Phone Book from the menu bar to display the following dialog box 2 Creating the group name Click the New Group button to display the Group Setting dialog box Input a group name example A Corporation to which the...

Page 791: ... Communication FX 2N 232IF H Programming Communication I Remote Maintenance Apx A Discontinued models 3 Selecting a group name to which the counterpart telephone number will be registered Click and select an already created group name example A Corporation Click the New Phone Number button 4 Inputting the name telephone number etc Input required items and click OK button If there is another counte...

Page 792: ...he AT command for initializing a modem connected to the personal computer for remote access 1 Setting the AT command Select Remote Environment Modem from the toolbar to display the following dialog box 2 Registering the AT command for the connected modem 1 When the connected modem is shown in the list Select the modem model name and click the OK button Proceed to step 4 2 When the connected modem ...

Page 793: ...ion below Input the AT command while referring to the description below 1 In the case of a modem whose operation is confirmed For a modem whose operation is confirmed input the following AT command 1 When used the FXGP WIN select the model ME5614E 2 AT command structure For initializing a modem use the AT command developed by Hayes The Hayes AT command is generally expressed in the following forma...

Page 794: ...esired modem is set and click the OK button Set item PV AF288 AIWA PV AF3360 AIWA ME3314B OMRON ATE0S0 2Q0V1 M4 J0 Q0 ATE0S0 2Q0V1 M4 J0 Q0 ATE0S0 2Q0V1S15 8 H0 R1 Command echo E0 not provided E0 not provided E0 not provided Number of times of calling in automatic receiving S0 2 twice S0 2 twice S0 2 twice Result code display Q0 provided Q0 provided Q0 provided Result code format V1 character word...

Page 795: ...onnection destination This subsection explains how to register the telephone number of the line connection destination line connected to the modem of the desired PLC 1 Displaying the line connection dialog box Select Remote Connect to PLC from the toolbar to display the following dialog box 2 Inputting the telephone number of the line connection destination Click the New Entry button When the foll...

Page 796: ...o be connected to the PLC For details refer to Chapter 6 2 Turning OFF the PLC power After inputting the AT command to the PLC turn OFF the PLC power 3 Connecting the modem Connect the communication equipment of the PLC to the modem For details refer to Chapter 4 4 Turning ON the modem power Turn ON the modem power connected to the PLC 5 Turning ON the PLC power After turning ON the power to the m...

Page 797: ...r to GX Developer Operating Manual 7 2 1 For GX Works2 This subsection explains the line connection procedure using GX Works2 Prepare for connection of the PLC connect a modem to the communication port in the personal computer and start up GX Works2 1 Setting the line connection Select Tools Set TEL Data Connect via Modem Line Connection from the menu bar to display the following dialog box 2 Sett...

Page 798: ...e logging data Put a check mark here when storing the log at the line connection to a file The log at the line connection is recorded in the following log file 1 For GX Works2 Storage destination For Windows 2000 and Windows XP User folder Application Data MITSUBISHI MELSOFT TEL Log For Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows 8 1 and Windows 10 User folder AppData Roaming MITSUBISHI MELSOFT TEL ...

Page 799: ...completed the following dialog box appears to indicate the telephone number of the connection destination and the communication speed Confirm the contents and click the OK button to close the dialog box Proceed to step 10 2 When the line cannot be connected When the line cannot be connected the following figure is displayed on the Line Connection dialog box Example When no response is given by the...

Page 800: ...evices 11 Disconnecting the line To disconnect the line select Tools Set TEL Data Connect via Modem Line Disconnection from the menu bar When the following dialog box appears click the Yes button to disconnect the line When line disconnection is finished the following dialog box appears to indicate the connection destination telephone number and line use time Click the OK button to close the dialo...

Page 801: ... modem to be used Select Remote Environment Modem from the toolbar to display the following dialog box Select the modem to be used and click the OK button If the modem to be used is not displayed click the New Entry button and register the AT command for the modem For details on AT command registration refer to Subsection 6 2 1 2 Connecting the connection destination Select Remote Connect to PLC f...

Page 802: ... and make a call from the modem connected to the personal computer 5 Checking the line connection status 1 When the line is connected When connection is completed the message box Executing is closed and the line connection time is displayed on the title bar as shown below Proceed to step 6 2 When the line cannot be connected When the line cannot be connected the message box Executing is closed and...

Page 803: ...ion G Non Protocol Communication FX 2N 232IF H Programming Communication I Remote Maintenance Apx A Discontinued models 6 Executing remote maintenance Read and write sequence programs and monitor devices 7 Disconnecting the line To disconnect the line select Remote Disconnect from the toolbar When the following dialog box appears click the Yes button to disconnect the line When the line is disconn...

Page 804: ...e status of the RXD RD and TXD SD indicator LEDs provided in the optional equipment When the power is turned ON the FX PLC transfers the AT command to the connected modem At this time the RXD RD and TXD SD indicator LEDs in the communication equipment light instantaneously If modem initialization is not set in parameters in the FX PLC however these LEDs do not light If the wiring and or modem spec...

Page 805: ...rameters make sure to turn OFF the PLC power and then turn it ON again 8 6 1 Checking parameters in PLC 1 Checking the communication setting Verify that non protocol communication computer link communication etc are not set in the parameters of the FX PLC If such communication is already set remote maintenance cannot be used 2 Checking the modem initialization setting Verify that the modem initial...

Page 806: ...aintenance cannot be used Verify that the setting contents are correct As reference the table below shows the set items and their contents of the AT commands already registered in PLCs 3 Checking CR H0D and LF H0A Make sure to input CR H0D and LF H0A at the end of the AT command If they are not input the AT command cannot be transferred For the AT command setting for the PLC refer to Chapter 5 PLC...

Page 807: ...OFF the PLC power and then turn the power ON again 3 In FX3U and FX3UC PLCs Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program If these instructions are used in the program the communication function is not available in ch1 Use ch2 or delete these instructions After deleting these instructions reboot the PLC s power 4 Presence of RS instruction except FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U and F...

Page 808: ...sible Verify that an error has not occurred 1 Checking M8063 When a communication error occurs M8063 turns ON and D8063 stores the corresponding error code 2 Checking the error code D8063 stores one of the following error codes When modem initialization is disabled D8063 stores the error code 6307 If D8063 stores any error code shown above check the following items Wiring Modem specifications Erro...

Page 809: ... store the communication type being used 1 Detailed contents These devices store the code of the communication type currently being used in the communication port When communication port ch1 is used D8419 stores the communication type When communication port ch2 is used D8439 stores the communication type The table below shows the contents of the communication type codes Code Description 0 Program...

Page 810: ...1 A Q a q 2 STX DC2 2 B R b r 3 ETX DC3 3 C S c s 4 EOT DC4 4 D T d t 5 ENQ NAK 5 E U e u 6 ACK SYN 6 F V f v 7 BEL ETB 7 G W g w 8 BS CAN 8 H X h x 9 HT EM 9 I Y i y A LF SUB J Z j z B VT ESC K k C FF FS L 1 l D CR GS M m E SO RS N ˆ n F SI US O _ o DEL Decimal ASCII hexadecimal Alphabet ASCII hexadecimal Alphabet ASCII hexadecimal Code ASCII hexadecimal 0 30 A 41 N 4E STX 02 1 31 B 42 O 4F ETX 0...

Page 811: ...ntil December 31 2022 FX1N 485 BD December 31 2015 Until December 31 2022 FX2N CNV BD December 31 2015 Until December 31 2022 FX2N 232 BD December 31 2015 Until December 31 2022 FX2N 422 BD December 31 2015 Until December 31 2022 FX2N 485 BD December 31 2015 Until December 31 2022 FX 232ADP June 30 2002 Until June 30 2009 FX 485ADP June 30 2002 Until June 30 2009 FX2 40AW June 30 2002 Until June 3...

Page 812: ...AB0 June 30 2008 Until June 30 2015 FX 25DU September 30 2002 Until September 30 2009 FX 30DU B September 30 2002 Until September 30 2009 FX 40DU B September 30 2002 Until September 30 2009 FX 40DU TK B September 30 2002 Until September 30 2009 FX 50DU TK S September 30 2002 Until September 30 2009 Discontinued model Production stop date Repair acceptance period ...

Page 813: ...ppendix A Discontinued models A Common Items B N N Network C Parallel Link D Computer Link E Inverter Communication F Non Protocol Communication RS RS2 Instruction G Non Protocol Communication FX 2N 232IF H Programming Communication I Remote Maintenance Apx A Discontinued models MEMO ...

Page 814: ...nsibility of Mitsubishi 1 Loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products 2 Special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products 3 Replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 4 The Mitsubishi programma...

Page 815: ...fied 11 2009 F The baud rate of the RS instruction RS2 instruction inverter communication computer link of the FX3U and FX3UC Series corresponds to 38400bps The addition and the change of other coverage Clerical error is modified 8 2010 G Inverter multi command FNC275 IVMC are added FX3UC DS Series are added Caution on using VRRD and VRSC command is added FX3U FX3UC Series corresponding GX Works2 ...

Page 816: ...ed 4 2015 M A part of the cover design is changed 7 2016 N Inverter F800 A800 Series are added FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Series corresponding FX3U 128ASL M is added to system configurations Discontinued models are added The change of warranty coverage Clerical error is modified 11 2017 P The change of time at which the communication settings of RS RS2 instruction become valid Discontinued models ...

Page 817: ......

Page 818: ...CHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN JY997D16901P MEE Effective November 2017 Specifications are subject to change without notice MODEL FX U COMMU E MODEL CODE 09R715 FX SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS USER S MANUAL Data Communication Edition ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for FX-485ADP

Panasonic CF-AAV1601AW User Manual preview
CF-AAV1601AW
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 8
Balluff BIC 1B0-IT1A7-Q40KFU-SM4A4A Installation Manual preview
BIC 1B0-IT1A7-Q40KFU-SM4A4A
Brand: Balluff Pages: 3
Balluff BAE PD-ML-010-04 Quick Start Manual preview
BAE PD-ML-010-04
Brand: Balluff Pages: 2
UGREEN CM656 Manual preview
CM656
Brand: UGREEN Pages: 9
Therma-Stor Phoenix Window Adapter Owner'S Manual preview
Phoenix Window Adapter
Brand: Therma-Stor Pages: 4
Abus ITAC10300 User Manual preview
ITAC10300
Brand: Abus Pages: 23
ISY IAC 4500 User Manual preview
IAC 4500
Brand: ISY Pages: 20
IBM Redbooks ServeRAID-3HB Installation Instructions Manual preview
Redbooks ServeRAID-3HB
Brand: IBM Pages: 20
Alpine KCA-420i Owner'S Manual preview
KCA-420i
Brand: Alpine Pages: 44
Sony CBK-WA100 Brochure & Specs preview
CBK-WA100
Brand: Sony Pages: 2
Sony BRAVIA KDL-60EX701 Specifications preview
BRAVIA KDL-60EX701
Brand: Sony Pages: 2
Sony BRAVIA KDL-55EX711 Features & Specifications preview
BRAVIA KDL-55EX711
Brand: Sony Pages: 2
Sony BKM-V11 Operating Instructions preview
BKM-V11
Brand: Sony Pages: 2
Sony BKM-V10 Operating Instructions preview
BKM-V10
Brand: Sony Pages: 2
Sony BKM-FW50 Specifications preview
BKM-FW50
Brand: Sony Pages: 2
Sony BKM-FW50 Brochure preview
BKM-FW50
Brand: Sony Pages: 4
Sony BKM-FW31 Specifications preview
BKM-FW31
Brand: Sony Pages: 1
Sony BKM-FW16 Operating Instructions preview
BKM-FW16
Brand: Sony Pages: 2

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands